JVC Home Theater System TH M42 User Manual

DVD DIGITAL THEATER SYSTEM  
TH-M42  
Consists of XV-THM42, SP-PWM45, SP-THM45C, SP-THM45F and SP-THM45S  
For Customer Use:  
INSTRUCTIONS  
Enter below the Model No. and Serial  
No. which are located either on the rear,  
bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this  
information for future reference.  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
LVT1024-017A  
[J]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warnings, Cautions and Others  
For Canada/pour le Canada  
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH  
WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.  
ATTENTION: POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES,  
INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE  
DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET  
POUSSER JUSQUAU FOND.  
For Canada/pour le Canada  
THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE  
CLASS B LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM  
DIGITAL APPARATUS AS SET OUT IN THE  
INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD  
ENTITLED “DIGITAL APPARATUS,” ICES-003 OF THE  
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS.  
CET APPAREIL NUMERIQUE RESPECTE LES LIMITES  
DE BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES APPLICABLES AUX  
APPAREILS NUMIRIQUES DE CLASSE B PRESCRITES  
DANS LA NORME SUR LE MATERIEL BROUILLEUR:  
“APPAREILS NUMERIQUES”, NMB-003 EDICTEE PAR  
LE MINISTRE DES COMMUNICATIONS.  
Note to CATV system installer:  
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s  
attention to Section 820-40 of the NEC which provides  
guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies  
that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding  
system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as  
practical.  
CAUTION!  
To avoid personal injury or  
accidentally dropping the unit,  
have two persons unpack, carry,  
TH-M42: 25.2 kg/56 lbs  
and install the unit.  
G-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of contents  
Introduction......................................2  
Notes on handling..................................................................2  
Supplied accessories .............................................................2  
Creating realistic sound fields ......27  
Using the surround mode....................................................29  
Adjusting the sound.............................................................30  
About discs ......................................3  
Playable disc types ................................................................3  
Disc structure ........................................................................4  
Playback Control function (PBC) — VCD and SVCD only ......4  
Advanced operations.....................31  
Using the on-screen bar ......................................................31  
Playing from a specified position on a disc..........................32  
Using the MP3 control display.............................................34  
Using the JPEG control display............................................35  
Selecting a view angle of DVD .............................................36  
Selecting the subtitle/audio languages.................................37  
Special picture playback ......................................................39  
Program Playback................................................................41  
Random Playback................................................................42  
Repeat Playback ..................................................................42  
Names of parts and controls ...........5  
Getting started.................................8  
Connections...........................................................................8  
Using the remote control .....................................................14  
Basic operations ............................17  
Turning the system on/off....................................................17  
Selecting the source to play.................................................18  
Adjusting the volume ...........................................................18  
Turning off the sound temporarily .......................................18  
Adjusting the brightness......................................................18  
Using the Sleep Timer..........................................................19  
Adjusting the output level of the subwoofer.........................19  
Adjusting the bass/treble sound...........................................19  
Changing the decode mode .................................................20  
Changing the scan mode .....................................................20  
Setting DVD preferences ...............44  
Using the choice menus ......................................................44  
Menu description.................................................................46  
Parental Lock.......................................................................49  
System setting...............................52  
AV COMPU LINK remote control  
system............................................53  
References .....................................54  
Maintenance ........................................................................54  
Trouble shooting..................................................................54  
Glossary...............................................................................57  
Index....................................................................................58  
Specifications ......................................................................59  
Playback.........................................21  
Basic playback .....................................................................21  
Playback features.................................................................23  
Tuner operations............................25  
Manual tuning......................................................................25  
Preset tuning .......................................................................25  
Selecting the FM reception mode.........................................26  
Reducing the noise of AM broadcast ...................................26  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
7 Safety precautions  
Notes on handling  
7 Important cautions  
Avoid moisture, water and dust  
Do not place the system in moist or dusty places.  
Avoid high temperatures  
Do not expose the system to direct sunlight and do not place it near  
a heating device.  
Installation of the system  
• Select a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor too cold;  
between 5°C and 35°C (41°F and 95°F).  
When you are away  
When away on travel or for other reasons for an extended period of  
time, disconnect the power cord plug from the wall outlet.  
• Leave sufficient distance between the system and the TV.  
• Do not use the system in a place subject to vibration.  
Power cord  
Do not block the vents  
Blocking the vents may damage the system.  
• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands!  
• A small amount of power (1.0 watt) is always consumed while  
the power cord is connected to the wall outlet (center unit only).  
• When unplugging the power cord from the wall outlet, always  
pull on the plug, not the power cord.  
Care of the cabinet  
When cleaning the system, use a soft cloth and follow the relevant  
instructions on the use of chemically-coated cloths. Do not use  
benzene, thinner or other organic solvents including disinfectants.  
These may cause deformation or discoloring.  
To prevent malfunctions of the system  
• There are no user-serviceable parts inside. If anything goes  
wrong, unplug the power cord and consult your dealer.  
• Do not insert any metallic object into the system.  
• Do not use any non-standard shape disc (like a heart, flower or  
credit card, etc.) available on the market, because it may damage  
the system.  
If water gets inside the system  
Turn the system off and disconnect the power cord plug from the  
wall outlet, then call the store where you made your purchase.  
Using the system in this condition may cause fire or electrical  
shock.  
• Do not use a disc with tape, stickers, or paste on it, because it  
may damage the system.  
Label sticker  
Supplied accessories  
Check to be sure you have all of the supplied accessories.  
The number in parentheses is the quantity of the pieces supplied.  
If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately.  
Sticker  
Paste  
• Remote control (1)  
• Batteries (2)  
• FM antenna (1)  
Note about copyright laws  
• AM loop antenna (1)  
• Power cord (1)  
Check the copyright laws in your country before recording from  
DVDs, Super Video CDs (SVCDs), Video CDs (VCDs) and Audio  
CDs. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright  
laws.  
• System cord (1)  
• Composite video cord (1)  
• Speaker cords  
Note about copyguard system  
DVDs are protected by copyguard system. When you connect the  
system to your VCR directly, the copyguard system activates and  
the picture may not be played back correctly.  
5 m (16 ft): For satellite (front left/right) and center speakers (3)  
10 m (32 ft): For satellite speakers (surround left/right) (2)  
(Length of speaker cords is approximate.)  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other  
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only  
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About discs  
Especially, the configuration and characteristics of an MP3 disc  
or a JPEG disc are determined by the writing (encoding) software  
and hardware used for recording. Therefore, due to the software  
and hardware used, the following symptoms may occur:  
Playable disc types  
This system has been designed to play back the following discs:  
DVD Video (DVD), Video CD (VCD), Super Video CD (SVCD),  
Audio CD, CD-R and CD-RW.  
Some discs may not be played back.  
Some tracks on an MP3 disc may be skipped or may not be  
played back normally.  
• This system can also play back MP3 and JPEG files recorded on  
Some files on a JPEG disc may be played back distortedly.  
A
CD-Rs and CD-RWs. ( pg. 21)  
• Before playing back CD-Rs or CD-RWs, read their instructions  
or cautions carefully.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time. This is caused by  
the fact that the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of  
regular CDs.  
• This system can also play back finalized DVD-Rs recorded in  
DVD VIDEO format. However, some discs may not be played  
back because of their disc characteristics or recording conditions.  
Discs you can play:  
Region  
Disc  
Video  
About MP3 discs  
Mark (Logo)  
Code  
Type  
Format  
MP3 is an abbreviation for Motion Picture Experts Group 1 (or  
MPEG-1) Audio Layer 3. MP3 is simply a compressed data file  
format. By using MP3 format, one CD-R or CD-RW can contain 10  
times as much data as one regular CD.  
Number*  
DVD  
VCD  
NTSC  
NTSC  
1/ALL  
About JPEG discs  
A still-picture data compression system proposed by the Joint  
Photographic Expert Group, which features small decrease in  
image quality in spite of its high compression ratio.  
SVCD  
Audio CD  
CD-R  
NTSC  
Notes on MP3/JPEG discs  
• MP3/JPEG discs (either CD-R or CD-RW) require a longer  
readout time. (It differs due to the complexity of the directory/file  
configuration.)  
• When making an MP3/JPEG disc, select ISO 9660 Level 1 or  
Level 2 for the disc format.  
• This system supports “multi-session” discs (up to 5 sessions).  
• This system cannot play “packet write” discs.  
• The system can only play MP3/JPEG files with the following file  
extensions;  
MP3: “.MP3”, “.Mp3”, “.mP3” and “.mp3”  
JPEG: “.jpg”, “.jpeg”, “.JPG”, “.JPEG” and any uppercase and  
lowercase combination (such as “.Jpg”)  
CD-RW  
Note on Region Code  
*
• If both MP3 files and JPEG files are recorded on a disc, set the  
MP3/JPEG setting in the PICTURE menu to the appropriate  
setting for the data to be read (“MP3” or “JPEG”). ( pg. 47)  
DVD players and DVDs have their own Region Code numbers. This  
system can only play back DVDs recorded with the color system of  
NTSC whose Region Code number includes “1”.  
A
• Some MP3/JPEG discs may not be played back because of their  
disc characteristics or recording conditions.  
Examples:  
Notes on MP3 discs only  
• ID3* tags cannot be shown on the display.  
* An MP3 file can contain file information called an “ID3 Tag”  
where its album name, performer, track title, etc. are recorded.  
There are two versions, ID3v1 (ID3 Tag version 1) and ID3v2  
(ID3 Tag version 2).  
• We recommend to record each piece of material (song) at a  
sample rate of 44.1 kHz and at a data transfer rate of 128 kbps.  
• Some tracks on an MP3 disc may be skipped or may not be  
played back normally.  
If a DVD with an improper Region Code number is loaded,  
“REGION CODE ERROR!” appears on the TV screen and playback  
cannot start.  
• The following discs cannot be played back:  
DVD Audio, DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, CD-ROM,  
CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo CD, etc.  
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the  
speakers.  
• On some DVDs, Video CDs or SVCDs, their actual  
operation may be different from what is explained in this  
manual. This is due to the disc programming and disc  
structure, not a malfunction of this system.  
Notes on JPEG discs only  
• We recommend to record a file at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file  
has been recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480, it will  
take a longer time to be displayed.)  
• This system can only play baseline JPEG files*. Progressive  
JPEG files* or lossless JPEG files* cannot be played.  
* Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras, web, etc.  
Progressive JPEG format:Used for web.  
Notes on CD-R and CD-RW  
• User-edited CD-Rs (Recordable) and CD-RWs (Rewritable) can  
be played back only if they are already “finalized”.  
• This system can play back CD-Rs or CD-RWs recorded on a  
personal computer if they have been recorded in the audio CD  
format.  
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used now.  
• Some files on a JPEG disc may be played back distortedly.  
This system can also play back CD-Rs or CD-RWs if MP3 files  
or JPEG files are recorded on them.  
However, some discs may not be played back because of their  
disc characteristics, recording conditions, or damage or stain on  
them.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
About discs  
IMPORTANT  
Before playing a disc, make sure of the following;  
• Check the connection with the TV.  
• Turn on your TV and select the correct input mode on the TV to view  
the pictures or on-screen information on the TV screen.  
• For DVD playback, you can change the initial setting to your  
Playback Control function  
(PBC) — VCD and SVCD  
only  
The Playback Control function allows you to enjoy menu-driven  
operation and high-resolution still images which have a resolution  
four times greater than moving pictures.  
A
preference. ( pg. 44 – 51)  
If B appears on the TV screen when pressing a button;  
The disc cannot accept the operation you have tried to do, or the  
information required for that operation is not recorded on the  
disc.  
High-resolution still image display  
You can display high-quality images which are four times clearer  
than moving pictures.  
NOTICE:  
be accepted.  
B
In some cases, without showing , operations will not  
Menu-driven playback  
A selection menu is displayed when you start playing a Video CD  
or SVCD with the Playback Control feature. The selection menu  
shows a list of numbers for selection. Some discs may show  
moving pictures or a divided screen.  
You can interact with the screen using a menu display to select and  
play an entry.  
See example illustration below about basic features of menu-driven  
playback (for details about the operation through the menu, also see  
page 33).  
Disc structure  
DVD  
A DVD consists of “titles” and each title may be divided into  
“chapters”.  
For example, if a DVD contains movies, each movie may have its  
own title number and may be further divided into chapters.  
Menu screen  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Submenu  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 3  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
Press RETURN.  
Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD  
A Video CD, SVCD, Audio CD consists of “tracks”.  
In general, each track has its own track number. (On some discs,  
each track may also be further divided by indexes.)  
Press  
RETURN.  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
MP3 discs  
Press RETURN.  
On an MP3 disc, each song is recorded as a track (file). Tracks are  
usually grouped into a group (folder). Groups can also include  
other groups, creating hierarchical group layers. This system can  
recognize up to 150 tracks per group and up to 99 groups per disc.  
• If there is any type of file other than MP3 files in a group  
(folder), those files are also counted in the total number of 150.  
A: Moving picture  
B: Still picture  
NOTE  
• When operating a Video CD or SVCD using the menu, some  
functions such as Repeat Playback may not work.  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Track 1 Track 2  
Group 3  
Group 4  
Group 5  
JPEG discs  
On a JPEG disc, each still picture is recorded as a file. Files are  
usually grouped into a group (folder). Groups can also include  
other groups, creating hierarchical folder layers. This system can  
recognize up to 150 files per group and up to 99 groups per disc.  
• If there is any type of file other than JPEG files in a group  
(folder), those files are also counted in the total number of 150.  
Group 1  
Group 2  
File 1  
File 2  
Group 3  
Group 4  
Group 5  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Names of parts and controls  
Front panel (center unit)  
A Standby lamp (STANDBY) A pg. 17  
B Standby-on button (F STANDBY/ON) A pg. 17  
C Stop button (7) A pg. 21  
I Volume control (VOLUME) A pg. 18  
J Disc trays A pg. 21  
K Illumination lamp A pg. 18  
L Remote sensor A pg. 14  
D Play button (3) A pg. 21  
E Pause button (8) A pg. 21  
M Display window A pg. 6, 22  
N Open/close buttons (0) A pg. 21  
O Disc buttons (DISC 1-5) A pg. 21  
F Reverse skip button (4) A pg. 24  
G Forward skip button (¢) A pg. 24  
H Source button (SOURCE) A pg. 18  
Rear panel (center unit)  
A System cord connector A pg. 10  
F Video input jacks (VCR IN) A pg. 12  
VIDEO, S-VIDEO  
G Video output jacks (VIDEO OUT) A pg. 8  
COMPONENT (Y, PB, PR)  
B Audio input jacks (AUDIO IN (VCR)) A pg. 12  
C Digital input jack (DIGITAL IN) A pg. 12  
D Antenna terminals (ANTENNA) A pg. 9  
E Video output jacks (VIDEO OUT) A pg. 8  
VIDEO, S-VIDEO  
H AV COMPU LINK-III jacks A pg. 53  
I Ó AC IN socket  
A
pg. 13  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names of parts and controls  
Display window (center unit)  
A Disc indicators A pg. 23  
B MP3 indicator A pg. 22  
C Channel indicator (CH) A pg. 26  
D Main display A pg. 22  
I Dolby Pro Logic II indicator (GPLII) A pg. 27  
Linear PCM indicator (LPCM) A pg. 28  
Digital signal format indicators A pg. 28  
Dolby Digital (GDIGITAL), DTS (C)  
E Stereo indicator (ST) A pg. 25  
F Tuning indicator (TUNED) A pg. 25  
G Auto muting indicator (AUTO MUTING) A pg. 26  
J Surround indicator (SURROUND) A pg. 29  
K DSP indicator A pg. 27 – 29  
L Progressive mode indicator (PROGRESSIVE) A pg. 20  
H Source signal indicators (abcdghi)  
M Resume indicator (RESUME) A pg. 22  
A
N
A
pg. 28  
Subwoofer indicator (  
Repeat mode indicators pg. 42  
A
)
pg. 28  
A
Sound reproducing speaker indicator (  
)
pg. 28  
Powered subwoofer  
Rear  
Front  
A System cord connector A pg. 10  
B Front speaker terminals (FRONT SPEAKERS) A pg. 11  
C Center speaker terminals (CENTER SPEAKER) A pg. 11  
D Surround speaker terminals (SURROUND SPEAKERS) A pg. 11  
E Power cord A pg. 13  
F Power lamp (POWER ON) A pg. 17  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Names of parts and controls  
A Remote control mode selector A pg. 15 – 52  
AUDIO, TV, VCR/DBS  
Remote control  
B Muting button (MUTING) A pg. 18  
C Disc buttons (DISC 1-5) A pg. 21  
D TV volume buttons (TV VOL +/–) A pg. 15  
E Operating buttons  
A
Play button (3)  
Forward/reverse skip buttons (¢/4)  
Fast-forward/reverse playback buttons (¡/1)  
pg. 22  
pg. 24  
pg. 26  
A
Stop button (7)  
pg. 21  
pg. 21  
A
Pause button (8)  
Tuning buttons (TUNING ª, TUNING ·)  
Memory button (MEMORY)  
FM reception/Beat Cut mode button (FM MODE)  
A
pg. 26  
A
F Top menu button (TOP MENU) A pg. 32  
G Cursor buttons (3/2///5) A pg. 32  
A
Enter button (ENTER)  
pg. 15  
H One Touch Replay button ( ) A pg. 23  
A
Record button (REC)  
pg. 16  
I Audio button (AUDIO) A pg. 37, 38  
J Subtitle button (SUBTITLE) A pg. 37  
K VFP setting button A pg. 40  
A
Progressive mode button (PROGRESSIVE)  
L Choice menu button (CHOICE) A pg. 44  
M Setting button (SETTING) A pg. 52  
pg. 20  
N Title/group button (TITLE/GROUP) A pg. 33  
O Repeat button (REPEAT) A pg. 42  
P A-B repeat button (A-B REPEAT) A pg. 43  
Q Sleep button (SLEEP) A pg. 19  
R Dimmer button (DIMMER) A pg. 18  
S Surround buttons (SURROUND)  
A
Mode (MODE), On/Off (ON/OFF)  
T Effect button (EFFECT) A pg. 30  
U Test tone button (TEST) A pg. 30  
pg. 29  
V Subwoofer adjustment buttons (S.WFR +/–) A pg. 19  
W Center speaker adjustment buttons (CENTER +/–) A pg. 30  
X Standby-on button (F AUDIO) A pg. 17  
Y Standby-on button (F VCR/DBS) A pg. 15  
Z Standby-on button (F TV) A pg. 15  
a Source selecting buttons A pg. 18  
DVD, FM/AM, DBS, VCR  
b TV/Video mode button (TV/VIDEO) A pg. 15  
c Channel buttons (CHANNEL +/–) A pg. 15  
d Volume buttons (AUDIO VOL +/–) A pg. 18  
e Menu button (MENU) A pg. 32  
f On-screen button (ON SCREEN) A pg. 31  
g Number buttons A pg. 15, 24, 33  
A
TV returning button (TV RETURN)  
pg. 15  
h Return button (RETURN) A pg. 4, 33  
i Angle button (ANGLE) A pg. 36  
j Decode mode button (DECODE) A pg. 20  
k Zoom button (ZOOM) A pg. 39  
l Cancel button (CANCEL) A pg. 41  
m Display window button (FL DISPLAY) A pg. 22  
n Treble adjustment buttons (TREBLE +/–) A pg. 19  
o Bass adjustment buttons (BASS +/–) A pg. 19  
p Surround speaker adjustment buttons (SURR) A pg. 30  
Left (L +/–), Right (R +/–)  
NOTE  
• To use buttons  
I
W
g
p
, slide  
and  
down the remote  
control cover.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Connections  
Do not connect the AC power cord until all other connections have been made.  
• Since different components often have different terminal names, carefully read the instructions supplied with the components you are going  
to connect.  
Connecting a TV  
To view pictures and on-screen displays, connect the TV to the center unit.  
You can get better picture quality in the order — Component video > S-video > Composite video.  
• Distortion of picture may occur when connecting to the TV via a VCR, or to a TV with a built-in VCR.  
A
You need to set “MONITOR TYPE” in the PICTURE menu correctly according to the aspect ratio of your TV. ( pg. 47)  
7 To connect a TV through the component video input jacks  
If your TV has component video input jacks, connect them using a component video cord (not supplied) to view a high quality picture.  
• Connect “Y” to “Y”, “PB” to “PB”, “PR” to “PR” correctly.  
A
• If your TV supports progressive video input, you can enjoy a high quality picture by setting the progressive scan mode to active. ( pg. 20)  
Center unit  
Green  
Red  
To component video input  
TV  
Blue  
Component video cord  
(not supplied)  
NOTE  
• If the component video input jacks of your TV are of the BNC type, use a plug adapter (not supplied) to convert the pin plugs to BNC plugs.  
A
• The component video signals can be output only when you select “DVD” as the source to play. ( pg. 18)  
7 To connect a TV through the composite or S-video jacks  
Connect the TV using the composite video cord (supplied) or an S-video cord (not supplied).  
If your TV has an S-video (Y/C-separation) jack, you can get better picture quality than by using composite video connection.  
/
• Connect the S-video cord by matching the mark on the plug to the one on the rear of the center unit.  
Center unit  
To composite  
video input  
Composite video cord  
(supplied)  
TV  
or  
To S-video input  
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Getting started  
If reception is poor  
Connecting the FM and AM antennas  
Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals,  
connecting cords and power cords. This could cause poor reception.  
Connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered wire antenna (not  
supplied) to the AM EXT terminal. (Keep the AM loop antenna  
connected.)  
• Twist together both wires.  
7 AM loop antenna  
Setting up supplied AM loop antenna  
Attach the AM loop to its base by snapping the tabs on the loop into  
the slot on the base.  
AM loop antenna  
Outdoor single vinyl-covered wire antenna  
(not supplied)  
7 FM antenna  
Connecting supplied FM antenna  
Center unit  
If the antenna cord is covered with the insulation  
coat, twist and pull the insulation coat off and  
remove.  
Connecting AM loop antenna  
Center unit  
Extend the supplied FM  
antenna horizontally.  
If reception is poor  
Connect an outdoor FM antenna with standard type (75 coaxial)  
Press and hold down the terminal  
clamp.  
C
connector.  
Outdoor FM antenna  
(not supplied)  
Insert the antenna cord.  
Outdoor FM antenna cord  
(not supplied)  
Release finger from the clamp.  
NOTE  
C
• Disconnect the supplied FM antenna before attaching a 75 coaxial  
connector (the kind with a round wire going to an outdoor antenna).  
• We recommend that you use coaxial cable for the FM antenna as it is  
well-shielded against interference.  
• Turn the loop antenna until you have the best reception.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting started  
Connecting the powered subwoofer  
Connect the supplied powered subwoofer (SP-PWM45) using the system cord (supplied).  
• Connect the system cord by matching the 5 marks on the plugs to the ones on the center unit and powered subwoofer.  
System cord  
(supplied)  
Ensure that the  
mark on  
5
the plug faces down.  
Center unit  
Powered  
subwoofer  
Connecting the satellite speakers  
7 Speaker layout  
When positioning the speakers, to obtain the best possible sound  
from this system you need to place all satellite speakers at the same  
distance from the listening position with the front of each speaker  
facing toward the listener.  
Front left  
Front right  
When you cannot place them at the same distance from the  
listening position, you can make adjustment so that  
speakers operate as if they are placed at the best position.  
(A pg. 48)  
• Normally place the powered subwoofer in front of you. (Since  
bass sound is non-directional, you do not need to place it at the  
same distance as the other speakers.)  
Center  
speaker  
Powered  
subwoofer  
NOTE  
• Although the satellite speakers and the powered subwoofer are  
magnetically shielded, the TV screen may appear mottled. In this  
case, keep the distance between them to the TV to over 10 cm  
(4 inches).  
Surround left  
Surround right  
• For safety reasons, always ensure that there is sufficient space behind  
the powered subwoofer.  
• When you position the satellite speakers in a relatively high place,  
such as the top of your bookshelf, place them on a flat and level  
surface.  
• Speaker grilles are not removable. Trying to remove them by force  
may damage them.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Getting started  
7 Connecting the satellite (front, center, surround) speakers  
Be sure to identify each speaker  
(SP-THM45C/SP-THM45F/SP-THM45S) and connect them to the corresponding terminals of the  
powered subwoofer.  
CAUTION  
• When you connect (larger) speakers other than the supplied ones, only use speakers with the same speaker impedance (SPEAKER IMPEDANCE)  
as indicated by the speaker terminals on the rear of the powered subwoofer.  
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to one speaker terminal.  
Front speakers (SP-THM45F)  
Before connecting the  
speaker cords;  
Twist and pull the  
insulation coat off and  
remove.  
Press and hold  
the clamp.  
Insert the bare end of the  
speaker cord into the  
terminal.  
Release the  
clamp.  
ª
• Connect the white cords to the red ( ) terminals and black cords  
·
to the black ( ) terminals.  
Center speaker  
(SP-THM45C)  
Powered  
subwoofer  
White  
Black  
Red  
Surround speakers  
(SP-THM45S)  
Black  
CAUTION  
When installing the satellite speakers on the wall;  
• Be sure to have them installed on the wall by a qualified personnel.  
DO NOT install the satellite speakers on the wall by yourself to avoid unexpected damage from their falling off the wall due to incorrect installation  
or weakness in wall structure.  
• Care must be taken in selecting a location for speaker installation on a wall. Injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result if the speakers  
installed interfere with daily activities.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting started  
Connecting to an analog component  
You can enjoy the sound of an analog component such as a VCR, TV, or Cassette recorder with this system. Use RCA pin plug cords (not  
supplied) for connection.  
Center unit  
A
To composite video output  
Red  
White  
B
To S-video output  
To audio output  
C
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
RCA pin plug cord  
(not supplied)  
or  
Composite video cord  
(not supplied)  
C
A
B
C
C
VCR  
TV  
Cassette recorder  
NOTE  
• The signals input to the VIDEO jack of the VCR IN jacks will be output only from the VIDEO jack of the VIDEO OUT jacks, not from the S-VIDEO  
jack of the VIDEO OUT jacks.  
Connecting to a digital component  
You can enjoy the sound of a digital component such as a DBS (Direct Broadcast Satellite) tuner or MD recorder with this system. Use digital  
optical cord (not supplied) for connection.  
Before connecting a digital  
optical cord, unplug the  
protective plug.  
Center unit  
Digital optical cord  
(not supplied)  
To digital optical output  
DBS tuner  
MD recorder  
NOTE  
A
• Only digital audio signals can be input when selecting “DBS” as the source to play. ( pg. 18) When connecting a video component such as a DBS  
tuner, operate this system to listen to the sound.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Getting started  
Connecting the power cord  
Make sure that all connections have been completed, before plugging in the power cords of the center unit and powered subwoofer.  
1 Firmly insert the supplied power cord into the  
Ó
AC IN socket on the rear of the center  
unit.  
2
Plug both power cords into AC outlets.  
Powered subwoofer  
Center unit  
Plug into AC outlets.  
Power cord  
(supplied)  
Power cord  
CAUTION  
• Disconnect the power cord before cleaning or moving the system.  
• Do not touch the power cord with wet hands.  
• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When unplugging the cord, always grasp and pull the plug so as not to damage the cord.  
NOTE  
• Keep power cords away from other connected cords. The power cords may cause noise or screen interference.  
• Preset settings, such as preset stations and surround mode adjustment, may be erased in a few days in the following cases;  
If you unplug the power cord of the center unit.  
If a power failure occurs.  
• The speakers will not produce any sound if the power cord of the powered subwoofer is removed from the AC outlet while the center unit is turned on.  
AUDIO  
STANDBY/ON  
on the center unit to turn the power off, plug in the powered subwoofer,  
In this case, press  
on the remote control or  
F
F
AUDIO  
STANDBY/ON  
again.  
then press  
or  
F
F
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting started  
Operating the system from the remote  
control  
Using the remote control  
The remote control makes it easy to use many of the system  
functions from a distance of up to 7 m (23 ft) away.  
Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the center  
unit.  
You can also use the remote control supplied for this system to  
• To control other components, aim the remote control directly at  
the remote sensor on each component. Refer also to their  
instruction manuals.  
A
A
operate other manufacturers’ TVs ( pg. 15), VCRs ( pg. 16)  
A
and DBS tuners/CATV converters ( pg. 15).  
• To operate the remote control properly, do not hide the remote  
sensor by placing any obstructions in front of it.  
Putting batteries in the remote control  
Before using the remote control, first put in the 2 supplied batteries.  
1 Remove the battery  
cover on the back of  
the remote control.  
Remote sensor  
2 Insert the batteries.  
• Make sure to match polarity: (+) to  
(+) and (–) to (–).  
3 Replace the cover.  
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases,  
replace the batteries. Use two R6P (SUM-3)/AA (15F) type dry-  
cell batteries.  
CAUTION  
• Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking batteries;  
Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may  
differ in voltage.  
Always replace both batteries at the same time.  
Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting started  
4 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
the manufacturers code (2 digits).  
Examples:  
1
0
8
For a Hitachi TV: Press , then  
.
.
Remote control  
mode selector  
0
For a Toshiba TV:Press , then  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Code Manufacturer  
Code  
12  
01  
10  
02  
03  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Sharp  
Hitachi  
13  
Magnavox  
Mitsubishi  
Panasonic  
RCA  
06  
(play button)  
Sony  
07  
04, 11 Toshiba  
05 Zenith  
08  
09  
5 Release F TV.  
6 Try operating your TV by pressing  
F
TV.  
When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct  
code.  
If there is more than one code listed for corresponding brand,  
try each one until you enter the correct one.  
Number  
buttons  
NOTE  
• Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are  
changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.  
• Set the codes again after replacing the batteries of the remote control.  
7 Operation  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control to operate a  
TV;  
TV  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
.
The following buttons are available:  
F TV  
TV VOL +/–  
:
Turns TV on and off.  
Adjusts the volume.  
:
TV/VIDEO  
:
Selects the input mode (either TV or  
VIDEO).  
CHANNEL +/–  
:
Changes the channels.  
1-10 0 +10 (100+)  
,
,
: Selects the channel.  
TV RETURN  
:
Alternates between the previously selected  
channel and the current channel.  
For TV operations  
You can operate your TV using the remote control supplied with  
this system.  
• Refer also to the instruction manuals supplied with your TV.  
For DBS tuner or CATV converter  
operations  
You can operate your DBS tuner or CATV converter using the  
remote control supplied with this system.  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
You can operate a JVC TV without setting the remote control  
signal.  
• Refer also to the instruction manuals supplied with your DBS  
tuner or CATV converter.  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
to TV.  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
2 Press and hold F TV.  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
3 KPereepsthse bEutNtonTpEreRss.ed until step 4 is finished.  
to VCR/DBS.  
2 Press and hold DBS.  
3 KPereepsthse bEutNtonTpEreRss.ed until step 4 is finished.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Getting started  
4 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
the manufacturers code (2 digits).  
Examples:  
4 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
the manufacturers code (2 digits).  
Examples:  
0
1
.
0
.
0
9
.
5
.
For a GI Jerrold product:Press , then  
For a Philips VCR: Press , then  
2
2
For a Sony product:  
Press , then  
For an NEC VCR: Press , then  
Manufacturer  
Echostar  
Code  
Manufacturer Code  
Manufacturer Code  
21  
JVC  
01, 02, 03  
11, 26  
29  
Philips  
RCA  
09  
GI Jerrold  
Hamin/Regal  
Pioneer  
01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08  
Emerson  
Fisher  
05, 06  
24  
15, 16, 17, 18  
13, 14  
19  
Samsung  
Funai  
10, 14, 15, 16 Sanyo  
21, 22, 23  
27, 28  
30  
RCA  
Gold Star  
Hitachi  
Mitsubishi  
NEC  
12  
Sharp  
Scientific Atlanta  
Sony  
09, 10  
20  
04  
Shintom  
Sony  
13  
18, 19, 20  
08  
Zenith  
11, 12  
25  
Zenith  
Panasonic  
07, 17  
5 Release DBS.  
5 Release VCR.  
6 Try operating your DBS tuner or CATV  
F
6 Try operating your VCR by pressing  
converter by pressing  
When your DBS tuner or CATV converter turns on or off, you  
have entered the correct code.  
If there is more than one code listed for your brand, try each  
one until you enter the correct one.  
VCR/DBS.  
F
VCR/DBS.  
When your VCR turns on or off, you have entered the correct  
code.  
If there is more than one cord listed for your brand, try each  
one until you enter the correct one.  
NOTE  
• Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are  
changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.  
• Set the codes again after replacing the batteries of the remote control.  
NOTE  
• Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are  
changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.  
• Set the codes again after replacing the batteries of the remote control.  
7 Operation  
7 Operation  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control to operate a  
DBS tuner or CATV converter;  
1 Set the remote control mode selector to  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control to operate a  
VCR;  
VCR/DBS  
.
.
1 Set the remote control mode selector to  
DBS  
2 Press  
VCR/DBS  
.
VCR  
2 Press  
.
The following buttons are available:  
F VCR/DBS  
:
Turns DBS tuner or CATV converter on and  
off.  
Changes the channels.  
: Selects the channel.  
The following buttons are available:  
F VCR/DBS  
: Turns VCR on and off.  
CHANNEL +/–  
:
3
(play button): Starts playback.  
1-10 0 +10 (100+)  
,
,
7
:
Stops operation.  
8
:
¢
Pauses playback.  
Fast forwards video tape.  
Rewinds video tape.  
:
For VCR operations  
4
:
REC  
3
:
Press this button together with (play button) to  
You can operate your VCR using the remote control supplied with  
this system.  
8
start recording or together with to pause  
recording.  
• Refer also to the instruction manuals supplied with your VCR.  
CHANNEL +/–  
: Changes the TV channels on the VCR.  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
NOTE  
When operating a VCR or DBS tuner/CATV converter;  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
• The source setting of VCR or DBS remains after you have changed  
to VCR/DBS.  
AUDIO TV  
or  
the remote control mode selector to  
. When operating  
VCR or DBS tuner/CATV converter again, it is not necessary to press  
VCR DBS  
2 Press and hold VCR.  
or  
after setting the remote control mode selector.  
3 KPereepsthse bEutNtonTpEreRss.ed until step 4 is finished.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic operations  
This section mainly explains operations commonly used when you  
enjoy this system.  
• Turn on your TV and select the correct input mode on the TV.  
Turning the system on/off  
7 To turn the power on  
IMPORTANT  
On the remote control:  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation,  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
F
Press  
AUDIO.  
AUDIO  
.
On the center unit:  
Remote control  
mode selector  
F
Press  
STANDBY/ON.  
The STANDBY lamp goes off.  
A
When DVD is selected as the source ( pg. 18), the opening  
screen* appears on the TV screen.  
Opening screen  
*
The following messages may  
appear in the message area  
depending on the status of this  
system.  
Source  
selecting  
buttons  
• “OPEN”/“CLOSE”:  
Appears when opening or  
closing the selected disc tray.  
• “NOW READING”:  
Message area  
Appears when the system is  
reading the disc information.  
• “REGION CODE ERROR!”:  
Appears when the Region Code of the DVD does not match the  
code the center unit supports. The DVD cannot be played back.  
• “NO DISC”:  
Appears when no disc is loaded to the selected disc tray.  
7 To turn the power off  
On the remote control:  
F
Press  
AUDIO again.  
On the center unit:  
F
Press  
STANDBY/ON again.  
The STANDBY lamp lights.  
NOTE  
• The power supply to the subwoofer is linked to the center unit. The  
POWER ON lamp on the subwoofer lights green when the power is  
turned on.  
• A small amount of the power is consumed even when the power is  
turned off (center unit only). This is called standby mode and the  
STANDBY lamp lights in this mode. Unplug the power cord from the  
AC outlet to turn the power off completely.  
• You can also turn on the system by pressing the following buttons;  
One of buttons on the center unit  
One of the source selecting buttons on the remote control  
0
One of the DISC (1-5) buttons or on the center unit.  
3
You can use the same buttons on the remote control except after  
FM/AM  
pressing  
.
Illumination lamp  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic operations  
Selecting the source to  
play  
Turning off the sound  
temporarily  
On the remote control:  
On the remote control:  
(DVD, FM/AM, VCR or DBS).  
Press MUTING.  
“MUTING” appears on the display window and the sound turns off.  
DVD  
A
:
To play back a disc (DVD, Video CD etc.). ( pg. 21, 23)  
FM/AM  
A
: To tune in an FM or AM station. ( pg. 25)  
Each time you press the button, the band alternates  
between FM and AM.  
To select the source from a component connected to the  
To restore the sound  
VCR  
:
MUTING  
• Pressing  
Press  
again.  
AUDIO VOL +/–  
A
VCR IN jacks and AUDIO IN (VCR) jacks. ( pg. 12)  
VOLUME  
on the center  
(or turning  
DBS  
:
To select the source from a component connected to the  
unit) also restores the sound.  
A
DIGITAL IN (DBS) jack. ( pg. 12)  
On the center unit:  
Adjusting the brightness  
You can dim the indications on the display window, the  
illumination lamp level on the center unit.  
Press SOURCE repeatedly until the source  
name you want appears on the display  
window.  
Each time you press the button, the source changes as follows;  
On the remote control:  
DVD  
AM  
FM  
VCR  
DBS  
(back to the  
]
]
]
]
]
]
Press DIMMER.  
Each time you press the button, the brightness level changes as  
follows;  
beginning)  
The selected source name appears on the display window.  
Example:When “VCR” is selected.  
OFF  
DIMMER1  
DIMMER2  
(back to the  
]
]
]
]
beginning)  
• OFF:  
Returns to the normal level.  
• DIMMER1:Dims the display window, the illumination lamp.  
• DIMMER2:Dims the display window more than DIMMER1 and  
turns off the illumination lamp.  
NOTE  
• When a source except DVD is selected, this system does not output  
video signals.  
Adjusting the volume  
CAUTION  
• Always set the volume to minimum level before starting any source.  
If the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound could  
permanently damage your hearing and/or blow out the speakers.  
You can adjust the volume level within the range from “0”  
(minimum) to “70” (maximum).  
On the remote control:  
Press AUDIO VOL + or .  
+
• Press to increase volume.  
• Press to decrease volume.  
On the center unit:  
Turn VOLUME.  
VOLUME  
VOLUME  
• Turn  
• Turn  
clockwise to increase volume.  
counterclockwise to decrease volume.  
The volume level appears on the display window.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic operations  
To change the remaining time until the shut-off time  
SLEEP  
• Each time you press the button, the shut-off time changes.  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation,  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
Press  
repeatedly.  
AUDIO  
.
To cancel the Sleep Timer  
SLEEP  
Press  
window.  
repeatedly until “0min” appears on the display  
• Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer.  
Remote control  
mode selector  
NOTE  
• When DVD is selected as the source to play, the system can also turn  
off automatically if playback is not restarted within the length of time  
A
you have specified (Auto Standby function). ( pg. 49)  
• When both the Sleep Timer and Auto Standby function are activated,  
if the shut-off time set by the Auto Standby function comes earlier  
than the one set by the Sleep Timer, the Auto Standby function  
controls shut-off time.  
Adjusting the output level  
of the subwoofer  
You can adjust the output level within the range from –10 to 10.  
On the remote control:  
Press S.WFR +/.  
NOTE  
• You can also make adjustments using the choice menu shown on the  
A
TV screen. ( pg. 48)  
• The adjustments on a source take effect for the other sources.  
Adjusting the bass/treble  
sound  
You can adjust each enhancement level from the front speakers  
within the range from –10 to 10.  
On the remote control:  
Press BASS +/for bass sound.  
Press TREBLE +/for treble sound.  
NOTE  
• You can also make adjustments using the choice menu shown on the  
A
TV screen. ( pg. 47)  
• The adjustments on a source take effect for the other sources.  
• You can adjust bass/treble enhancement level only for front left/right  
channel. However, the supplied speakers cannot add the effective  
change to the bass sound because of their cutoff frequency even if the  
Using the Sleep Timer  
Using the Sleep Timer, you can fall asleep while listening to music  
and know the system will turn off by itself rather than play all night.  
A
bass sound adjustment is made. ( pg. 48)  
To change the bass enhancement level more efficiently, adjust the  
On the remote control:  
A
output level of the subwoofer. ( “Adjusting the output level of the  
Press SLEEP.  
Each time you press the button, the shut-off time changes as  
follows;  
subwoofer”)  
(When you change the front speakers to the larger ones and select  
A
“LARGE” for the front speakers in the SIZE sub-menu ( pg. 48),  
the effective adjustment of bass sound is also possible by pressing  
0min (cancelled)  
10min (minutes)  
20min  
30min  
]
]
]
]
BASS +/–  
.)  
60min  
90min  
120min  
150min  
(back to the  
]
]
]
]
]
beginning)  
To check the remaining time until the shut-off time  
SLEEP  
Press  
once.  
• The remaining time until the shut-off time appears on the display  
window for a while.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic operations  
Changing the decode  
mode  
When you play a disc (or software) encoded with Dolby Digital or  
DTS Digital Surround, the following symptoms may occur;  
• Sound does not come out at the beginning of playback.  
• Noise comes out while searching for or skipping chapters or  
tracks.  
Changing the scan mode  
This system supports the progressive scan system (480p*) as well  
as the conventional interlaced scan system (480i*).  
If your TV equipped with component jacks supports the  
progressive video input, you can enjoy a high quality picture by  
setting the progressive scan mode to active.  
• Refer also to the instruction manuals supplied with your TV.  
• If your TV equipped with component jacks does not support the  
progressive video input, do not change the scan mode to the  
progressive scan mode.  
In these cases, change the decode mode to “DOLBY D” (for Dolby  
Digital) or “DTS” (for DTS Digital Surround).  
7
When DVD or DBS is selected as the source  
* 480p and 480i indicate the number of scanning lines and  
scanning format of an image signal.  
On the remote control:  
480p indicates 480 scanning lines with progressive format.  
Press DECODE to select the decode mode.  
The current decode mode appears on the display window.  
Example:When “AUTO/PCM” is selected.  
480i indicates 480 scanning lines with interlaced format.  
7
When DVD is selected as the source  
On the remote control:  
1 Press DVD.  
Each time you press the button, the decode mode changes as  
follows;  
2 Press and hold PROGRESSIVE for  
3 seconds.  
Each time you perform this operation, the scan mode changes  
as follows;  
AUTO/PCM  
DOLBY D  
DTS  
(back to the  
]
]
]
]
beginning)  
• AUTO/PCM: Normally select this. The system automatically  
detects the incoming signals.  
INTERLACE  
PROGRESSIVE  
O
• INTERLACE: Select this if your TV equipped with  
component jacks supports the interlaced  
video input only.  
• DOLBY D: Select this if the symptoms above occur when  
playing a disc (or software) encoded with Dolby  
Digital.  
• PROGRESSIVE:Select this if your TV equipped with  
component jacks supports the progressive  
video input.  
• DTS:  
Select this if the symptoms above occur when  
playing a disc (or software) encoded with DTS  
Digital Surround.  
When “PROGRESSIVE” is selected, the PROGRESSIVE  
indicator lights.  
NOTE  
• When “DOLBY D” or “DTS” is selected, if a signal encoded with  
another digital format comes in, you cannot listen to the sound. (The  
NOTE  
DIGITAL or  
indicator flashes.)  
G
C
• There are some progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs that are not  
fully compatible with this system, resulting in an unnatural picture  
when playing back a DVD in the progressive scan mode. In such a  
case, change the scan mode to “INTERLACE”.  
• Changing the source returns the decode mode to “AUTO/PCM”  
automatically.  
To check the compatibility of your TV, contact your local JVC  
customer service center.  
• All JVC progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs are fully  
compatible with this system.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback  
This section explains basic operations of DVD player.  
For more details about DVD player operations, see pages 31 to 43.  
Basic playback  
shows the types of discs the operation is  
available for.  
7 To load a disc  
Up to 5 discs can be  
loaded.  
• Turn on your TV and select the correct input mode on the TV.  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
1 Set the remote control mode selector to  
1 Press 0 for a desired disc tray on the  
2 TPhleascysetema tdurinssconoannd tthheedisdcitsracy ctormaeys .out.  
center unit to open the disc tray.  
AUDIO  
.
DVD  
2 Press  
.
With the label side up  
Remote control  
mode selector  
When placing an 8 cm (3 inches) disc  
(play button)  
7 To start playback  
3 Press the selected DISC (1-5) button.  
The system starts playback after closing the disc tray.  
You can use the same buttons on the center unit for operations  
unless otherwise noted.  
When loading an MP3 disc  
A
The MP3 control display ( pg. 34) appears on the TV screen and  
playback starts from the first track in the first group after pressing  
DISC  
the  
button in step 3. When all tracks in a group have been  
played, the system starts playback of tracks in the next group.  
When loading a JPEG disc  
The slide-show* playback starts from the first file in the first group  
DISC  
after pressing the  
button in step 3. When stopping playback  
A
of a JPEG disc, the JPEG control display ( pg. 35) appears on the  
TV screen.  
* Slide-show  
Each file (still picture) is shown on the TV screen for about 3  
seconds, then changed to the next file one after another  
automatically. When all files in a group have been played, the  
system starts playback of files in the next group.  
7 To pause playback  
8
Press .  
3
To return to normal playback, press (play button).  
7 To stop playback  
7
Press  
.
To change the playback disc while playing back the  
another disc  
DISC (1-5)  
Press the desired  
button.  
• If no disc is set in the specified tray, the system starts playback of  
the disc in the next tray automatically.  
To remove a disc  
0
Press for a desired disc tray on the center unit.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Playback  
7 Playback information on the display window  
NOTE  
DVD  
DVD  
• You can also start playback by pressing (play button) or  
.
3
• Regardless of the operation for starting playback, the system plays  
back all available discs sequentially until you stop playback.  
However, the system stops playback after playback of the disc in the  
fifth tray.  
Example:When a DVD encoded with Dolby Digital 5.1ch is played  
Elapsed playing time  
(hour:minute:second)  
Disc indicators  
Chapter number  
A
• When Video CDs/SVCDs with PBC function ( pg. 4) or DVD that  
automatically go to the menu screen and wait for the next instruction,  
the system does not move to the next disc. In such a case, select the  
A
item to be played back from the menu. ( pg. 33)  
Signal and speaker indicators  
Surround mode and digital signal format  
• You can check playback information on the display window and the  
A
TV screen. ( pg. 31)  
• Some tracks on an MP3 disc may be skipped or may not be played  
back normally.  
FL DISPLAY  
alternate between those shown above and below.  
Each time  
is pressed, the indications  
• When you play back a JPEG disc, press buttons after the whole  
picture appears on the TV screen. The system cannot accept  
operations even though you press buttons while showing a picture.  
• Some files on a JPEG disc may be played back distortedly.  
• If a black screen continuously appears in the slide-show playback, the  
file currently being played may be a non-baseline JPEG file. In this  
case, select a playable file (a baseline JPEG file). For example, press  
Title number  
Chapter number  
MENU  
or  
to open the JPEG control display, etc. Note that it may  
7
take a long time to select another file.  
Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD  
Example:When a Video CD is played back  
7 Resume Playback (DVD/Video CD/SVCD only)  
Signal and speaker  
indicators  
A
When Resume Playback is set to “ON” ( pg. 49) and you stop  
Disc indicators  
Track number  
playback by the following operations, the position where playback  
has been stopped is stored. (The RESUME indicator lights.)  
A
• Turning off the power ( pg. 17)  
7
• Pressing  
A
• Changing the source ( pg. 18)  
Elapsed playing time (minute:second)  
To start playback from the stored position  
(The RESUME indicator goes off.)  
NOTE  
• When a Video CD or SVCD with PBC function is played, the elapsed  
playing time does not appear, but “PBC” appears.  
DISC  
3
• Press the selected  
button or (play button) on the remote  
control or the center unit.  
• Select DVD as the source again if you changed the source.  
MP3 disc  
Disc indicators  
Track number  
Signal and speaker  
indicators  
To clear the stored position  
7
Press again or open the disc tray with the playback disc.  
• When the stored position has been cleared, playback starts from  
the beginning of the disc.  
7 To prevent screen burn-out with the screen saver  
MP3 indicator  
Elapsed playing time (minute:second)  
(during playback only)  
A TV screen may burn out if a static picture is displayed for a long  
time. To prevent this, the system automatically dims the screen if a  
static picture is displayed for over 5 minutes (the screen saver  
function).  
FL DISPLAY  
Each time  
is pressed, the indications  
alternate between those shown above and below.  
• Pressing any button will cancel the screen saver function.  
• If you do not want to use the screen saver function, see page 47.  
Group number  
Track number  
7 On-screen guide icons  
During DVD playback, the following guide icons may appear for a  
while on the TV screen;  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-  
subtitle languages.  
JPEG disc  
Disc indicators  
File number  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-audio  
languages.  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-angle  
views.  
Group number  
(Play),  
(Pause),  
/
(Fast forward/  
fast-reverse),  
/
(Slow-motion forward/  
reverse): appears when you perform each operation.  
B
• If “ ” appears on the TV screen when pressing a button, the disc  
cannot accept an operation you have tried to do or information  
required for that operation is not recorded to the disc.  
NOTE  
• In some cases, without showing “ ”, operations will not be accepted.  
B
• If you do not want the on-screen guide icons to appear, see page 49.  
Continued on next page  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Playback  
NOTE  
Playback features  
A
• You can change the time information mode. ( pg. 32)  
• You can also check the playback information on the TV screen.  
A
IMPORTANT  
(
pg. 31)  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
1 Set the remote control mode selector to  
7 Disc information on the display window  
The disc indicators on the display window show the current status  
of the corresponding disc tray.  
AUDIO  
.
DVD  
2 Press  
.
Example:When the discs are loaded to disc trays 1, 2 and 5, and the  
disc in the disc tray 5 is selected.  
Currently loaded disc numbers  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Currently selected disc  
number (  
appears beside  
the disc number)  
NOTE  
When loading a disc;  
DISC  
• Only after a  
button is pressed the system starts reading the  
information of the disc on the specified tray. After that, the disc  
indicators show the current disc status correctly.  
(play button)  
7 Tray lock  
You can lock trays and prohibit the unwanted disc ejection by  
children.  
On the center unit ONLY:  
While the system is turned off  
7
0
Press and hold , then press for DISC 1.  
Number  
buttons  
• The system turns on and “LOCKED” appears on the display  
window.  
• If you try to eject discs, “LOCKED” appears and indicates that  
trays are locked.  
To unlock trays  
7
0
When the system is turned off, press and hold , then press for  
DISC 1  
.
• The system turns on and “UNLOCKED” appears on the display  
window.  
One Touch Replay  
You can move back the playback position by 10 seconds  
from the current position.  
7
During playback  
On the remote control:  
Press  
.
NOTE  
• This function works between chapters in the same title.  
• This function may not work for some DVDs.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playback  
Fast-forward/fast-reverse search  
Locating a desired selection using number  
buttons  
You can locate the  
desired title, chapter,  
track or file by  
You can search for a particular point  
while playing a disc.  
7
During playback  
On the remote control:  
selecting its number.  
¡ 1  
/
Press  
.
7
For DVD (title, chapter):  
Each time you press the button, the search speed changes as  
While stopped (the title number is selected.)  
During playback (the chapter number is selected.)  
follows;  
Forward:  
For Video CD/SVCD (track): During playback without PBC  
function  
*
*
For Audio CD/MP3/JPEG (track/file): During playback or while  
stopped  
Reverse:  
On the remote control:  
Press number buttons (1-10, +10) to select  
the desired title, chapter or track number.  
Examples:  
*
and  
are only available for DVD.  
To return to normal speed playback  
Press (play button).  
3
3
To select 3: Press  
To select 14:Press  
To select 24:Press  
To select 40:Press  
.
+10  
+10  
+10  
4
.
, then  
twice, then  
three times, then  
On the remote control and the center unit:  
4
.
¢ 4  
Press and hold  
Continuously pressing  
search speed as follows;  
/
¢ 4  
.
10  
.
/
increases the fast-forward/reverse  
The specified title, chapter, track or file number appears on the  
display window and playback begins from that location.  
NOTE  
• While playing a DVD, if a menu is shown on the TV screen, number  
To return to normal speed playback  
Release the button.  
A
buttons may be used for selecting an item in the menu. ( pg. 32)  
• While playing a Video CD or SVCD with the PBC function, if a menu  
is shown on the TV screen, number buttons are used for selecting an  
NOTE  
A
item in the menu. ( pg. 33)  
• When a DVD, Video CD or SVCD is played back, no sound comes  
out during fast-forward/reverse search.  
• When an Audio CD is played back, sound is intermittent and low  
during fast-forward/reverse search.  
• This function may not work for some DVDs.  
Locating the beginning of a desired  
selection  
You can locate the  
beginning of a  
chapter, track or file.  
7
For DVD (chapter): During playback  
For Video CD/SVCD (track): During playback without PBC  
function  
For Audio CD/MP3/JPEG (track/file): During playback or while  
stopped  
To skip chapters, tracks or files forward  
¢
Press  
as many times as required.  
To skip to the beginning of the current chapter, track or  
file  
4
Press  
To skip chapters, tracks or files backward  
4
Press  
as many times as required.  
NOTE  
• This function may not work for some DVDs.  
• When playing a Video CD or SVCD with the PBC function,  
and  
¢
may be used for the operations of menu-driven playback.  
pg. 4, 33)  
4
A
(
• When playing back an MP3/JPEG disc, you can make operations  
A
using the MP3/JPEG control display. ( pg. 34, 35)  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Tuner operations  
You can browse through all the stations or use the preset function to  
go immediately to a particular station.  
Manual tuning  
On the remote control:  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the  
1 Set the remote control mode selector to  
band.  
AUDIO  
.
Each time you press the button, the band alternates between  
FM and AM.  
FM/AM  
2 Press  
.
The selected band appears on the display window, then the last  
received station appears.  
Example:When AM is selected  
After a few seconds  
Remote control  
mode selector  
2 Press TUNING ª or TUNING ·  
repeatedly until you find the frequency  
you want.  
When you hold down the button until the system starts  
searching for stations and then release it, the system stops  
searching automatically when a station of sufficient signal  
strength is tuned in to.  
TUNING ª  
TUNING ·  
: Increases frequency.  
: Decreases frequency.  
NOTE  
• When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the TUNED  
indicator lights on the display window.  
Number buttons  
• When an FM stereo program is received, the ST indicator lights on the  
display window.  
Preset tuning  
Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be  
quickly tuned in. You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.  
7 To preset the stations  
NOTE  
Before you start operation;  
• There is a time limit when doing the following steps. If the setting is  
cancelled before you finish, start from step 2 again.  
1 Tune in the station you want to preset.  
• For the detailed procedure, see “Manual tuning”.  
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for an FM  
station, select the reception mode you want. See “Selecting  
A
the FM reception mode” ( pg. 26).  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Tuner operations  
2 Press MEMORY.  
Selecting the FM  
reception mode  
The channel number position starts flashing on the display  
window for about 5 seconds.  
When the stereo FM program currently tuned in is noisy, you can  
change the FM reception mode to improve the reception.  
You can store the FM reception mode for each preset station. See  
While the channel number position is flashing:  
A
“Preset tuning” ( pg. 25).  
3 Press number button(s) (1-10, +10) to  
7
While listening to an FM station  
select a channel number.  
The channel number and the CH indicator start flashing.  
Examples:  
On the remote control:  
Press FM MODE.  
The FM reception mode appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode alternates  
between AUTO MUTING” and “MONO”.  
3
+10  
For channel number 3: Press  
For channel number 14: Press  
.
4
.
, then  
(For FM stations only)  
AUTO MUTING:  
+10  
+10  
4
.
10  
For channel number 24: Press  
For channel number 30: Press  
twice, then  
twice, then  
When a program is broadcast in stereo, you will hear stereo  
sound. (The ST indicator lights on the display window.) When in  
monaural, you will hear monaural sound. This mode is also  
useful to suppress static noise between stations. The AUTO  
MUTING indicator lights on the display window.  
MONO:  
.
While the selected number is flashing:  
Reception will be improved although you will lose the stereo  
effect. (The ST indicator goes off.) In this mode, you will hear  
noise until you are tuned in to a station. (The AUTO MUTING  
indicator also goes off.)  
4 Press MEMORY again.  
The selected number stops flashing.  
5 TRhee pstaetiaont iss taesspigsned1totothe4seulenctetdilpyreoseut nusmtoberr.e all  
Reducing the noise of AM  
broadcast  
When listening to an AM broadcast with a lot of noise interference,  
you can change the Beat Cut mode to reduce the noise.  
the stations you want.  
To erase a stored preset station  
Storing a new station to a used number erases the previously stored  
one.  
7 To tune in to a preset station  
7
While listening to an AM station  
On the remote control:  
On the remote control:  
1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the  
Press FM MODE.  
The current Beat Cut mode appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the Beat Cut mode alternates  
between “BEAT CUT 1” and “BEAT CUT 2”.  
• Choose “BEAT CUT 1” or “BEAT CUT 2” according to which  
gives clearer sound.  
band.  
Each time you press the button, the band alternates between  
2 FPMreansdsAnMu. mber button(s) (1-10, +10) to  
select a preset channel number.  
Examples:  
3
+10  
For channel number 3: Press  
For channel number 14: Press  
.
4
.
, then  
(For FM stations only)  
+10  
+10  
4
.
10  
For channel number 24: Press  
For channel number 30: Press  
twice, then  
twice, then  
.
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Creating realistic sound fields  
You can use the following surround modes to reproduce a realistic  
sound field.  
Dolby Surround  
7 DTS Digital Surround  
**  
Used to reproduce multichannel soundtracks of the software  
encoded with DTS Digital Surround ( ).  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
Dolby Digital  
DTS Digital Surround (DTS) is another discrete multichannel  
digital audio format available on CD, LD and DVD software.  
Compared to Dolby Digital, audio compression ratio is relatively  
low. This fact allows DTS Digital Surround format to add breadth  
and depth to the reproduced sounds. As a result, DTS Digital  
Surround features natural, solid and clear sound.  
DTS Digital Surround  
DSP modes  
DAP modes  
All Channel Stereo  
7 Dolby Surround  
7 DSP modes  
DAP (Digital Acoustic Processor) modes  
DAP modes have been designed to create important acoustic  
surround elements.  
The sound heard in a live club, dance club, hall or pavilion consists  
of direct sound and indirect sound — early reflections and  
reflections from behind. Direct sounds reach the listener directly  
without any reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are  
delayed by the distances of the ceiling and walls (see the diagram  
below).  
These indirect sounds are important elements of the acoustic  
surround effects. The DAP mode can reproduce a realistic sound  
field by adding these indirect sounds.  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
*
Dolby Pro Logic II has a newly developed multichannel playback  
format to decode all 2 channel sources — stereo source and Dolby  
Surround encoded source — into a 5.1 channel.  
The matrix-based encoding/decoding method used by Dolby Pro  
Logic II makes no limitation for the cutoff frequency of the treble  
from surround channel and enables stereo surround sound  
compared to conventional Dolby Pro Logic.  
Dolby Pro Logic II enables to reproduce spacious sound from  
original sound without adding any new sounds and tonal coloration.  
Dolby Pro Logic II has two modes — Movie mode and Music  
mode:  
Pro Logic II Movie (PL II MOVIE)  
The following DAP modes are provided with this system.  
Suitable for reproduction of Dolby Surround encoded sources  
bearing the mark  
close to the one created with discrete 5.1 channel sounds.  
Pro Logic II Music (PL II MUSIC)  
. You can enjoy soundfield very  
Gives the feeling of a live music club with a  
low ceiling.  
LIVE CLUB  
DANCE CLUB  
HALL  
Gives a throbbing bass beat.  
Suitable for reproduction of any 2 channel stereo music sources.  
You can enjoy wide and deep sound by using this mode.  
G
Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a concert  
hall.  
• When Dolby Pro Logic II is activated, the  
lights on the display window.  
PLII indicator  
Gives the spacious feeling of a pavilion with a  
high ceiling.  
PAVILION  
Dolby Digital  
*
Used to reproduce multichannel soundtracks of the software  
encoded with Dolby Digital ( ).  
These DAP modes can be used to add the acoustic surround effects  
while reproducing 2 channel stereo source, and can give you a real  
“being there” feeling.  
• When one of the DAP modes is selected, the DSP indicator lights  
on the display window.  
Dolby Digital 5.1 ch (DOLBY D) encoding method (so-called  
discrete multichannel digital audio format) records and digitally  
compresses the front left channel, front right channel, center  
channel, surround left channel, surround right channel and LFE  
channel signals.  
Since each channel is completely independent from the other  
channel signals to avoid interference, you can obtain much better  
sound quality with much stereo and surround effects.  
NOTE  
• Dolby Digital software can be roughly grouped into two categories-  
multichannel (up to “5.1” channel) and 2 channel software. To enjoy  
surround sounds while playing Dolby Digital 2 ch software, you can  
use Dolby Pro Logic II.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered  
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
*
**  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Creating realistic sound fields  
Creating sound field  
7 Indicators on the display window  
Digital signal format indicators  
Reflections from behind  
LPCM:  
Lights when Linear PCM signal comes in.  
Early reflections  
G
DIGITAL: Lights when Dolby Digital signals come in.  
C
:
Lights when DTS Digital (Surround) signals come  
in.  
No indication: No digital signal indicator lights when analog  
signals come in.  
Source signal indicators, etc.  
Light to indicate the incoming signals.  
a
:
Lights when the left channel signal comes  
in.  
b
:
Lights when the center channel signal comes in.  
Lights when the right channel signal comes in.  
Lights when the LFE channel signal comes in.  
Lights when the surround left channel signal comes in.  
Lights when the surround right channel signal comes in.  
Lights when the monaural surround channel signal or 2  
channel Dolby Surround signal comes in.  
: Always lights.  
c
:
d
:
Direct sounds  
g
:
:
:
i
h
All Channel Stereo  
All Channel Stereo (ALL CH ST.) mode can reproduce a larger  
stereo sound field using all the connected (and activated) speakers.  
All Channel Stereo can be used while reproducing 2 channel stereo  
source.  
• When All Channel Stereo is selected, the DSP indicator lights on  
the display window.  
The channel with “ ” shows that the corresponding speakers are  
reproducing the channels’ sound.  
If the channels’ sound decoded into 5.1 channel is reproduced, only  
” lights.  
All Channel Stereo reproduction  
Normal stereo sound  
All Channel Stereo  
Available Surround modes for each input signal  
B
The marks show available surround modes.  
DSP mode  
DAP mode  
Mode  
Dolby Surround  
PL II  
DTS Digital  
Surround  
(DTS)  
Surround off  
(SURR OFF)  
ALL CH  
ST.  
PL II  
Dolby  
Digital  
LIVE  
DANCE  
*
HALL  
PAVILION  
*
Signal  
*
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
CLUB  
CLUB  
*
*
*
*
Dolby Digital  
(Multichannel)  
B
B
B
Dolby Digital  
(2 channel)  
B
B
DTS Digital  
Surround  
(Multichannel)  
B
B
DTS Digital  
Surround  
B
B
B
B
B
B
(2 channel)  
Analog (VCR/FM/  
AM) or Linear PCM  
B
B
B
B
B
SURROUND (MODE)  
A
* You can select these modes by pressing  
. ( pg. 29)  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Creating realistic sound fields  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
Using the surround mode  
The system is set up to automatically select the optimal surround  
mode for input signal from digital multichannel software.  
When playing back 2 channel source, you can select the desired  
surround mode manually.  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO  
.
On the remote control:  
Remote control  
mode selector  
7 When playing back digital multichannel software  
The appropriate multichannel surround mode is automatically  
activated.  
“DOLBY D”:When a software encoded with Dolby Digital is  
played back  
“DTS”:  
When a software encoded with DTS Digital  
Surround is played back  
In these cases, you can only turn on or off (“SURR OFF”) the  
surround mode.  
7 When playing back 2 channel source  
You can select either mode of Dolby Pro Logic II (PL II MOVIE/  
PL II MUSIC) or one of the DSP modes (LIVE CLUB/DANCE  
CLUB/HALL/PAVILION/ALL CH ST.).  
Press SURROUND (MODE).  
The surround mode is turned on and the current surround mode  
appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the surround mode changes as  
follows;  
PL II MOVIE  
PL II MUSIC  
PAVILION  
LIVE CLUB  
DANCE  
(back to the  
]
]
]
]
CLUB  
HALL  
ALL CH ST.  
]
]
]
]
beginning)  
For details on each mode, see pages 27 and 28.  
To turn off the surround mode  
Press SURROUND (ON/OFF).  
Each time you press the button, the surround mode turns on and off  
alternately.  
SURR OFF (surround off)  
(surround on)  
current selected mode  
O
NOTE  
• When selecting “PL II MUSIC”, “PL II MOVIE”, “DOLBY D” or  
“DTS” as the surround mode, the SURROUND indicator lights.  
• When selecting one of the DSP modes (“LIVE CLUB”/“DANCE  
CLUB”/“HALL”/“PAVILION”/“ALL CH ST.”) as the surround  
mode, the DSP indicator lights.  
• For Dolby Digital 2 channel software, you can select “PL II MUSIC”  
or “PL II MOVIE”.  
Storing adjustments auto memory  
This system memorizes the surround mode settings for each source.  
• When you turn the power off:  
When turning the power on again, the memorized settings for the  
current source are automatically recalled.  
• When you change the source:  
The memorized settings for the newly selected source are  
automatically recalled.  
NOTE  
• If the source is FM or AM, you can assign a different setting for each  
band.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Creating realistic sound fields  
Adjusting the sound  
On the remote control:  
1 Press TEST.  
Check if you can hear the sounds through all the speakers at  
the equal level.  
“TEST TONE” and the corresponding signal indicator starts  
flashing on the display window, and the test tone comes out of  
the speakers in the following order;  
Front left speaker (  
Front right speaker (  
)
a ]  
c ]  
Center speaker (  
Surround right speaker  
)
]
b ]  
)
(
)
Surround left speaker (  
)
(back to the  
i ]  
g ]  
2 bAedgijnunsintgt)he speaker output levels (10 to  
+10).  
Adjust the center speaker and surround speaker levels as much  
as the sound from the front speakers. Use one of the following  
buttons to adjust each speaker level.  
CENTER +/–  
SURR-L +/–  
SURR-R +/–  
for the center speaker  
for the surround left speaker  
for the surround right speaker  
3 Press TEST again to stop the test tone.  
7
A
4FoPrrDeAsPsmEodFesF(ECT to select the effect level  
pg. 27) only  
(1 to 5) you want.  
Each time you press the button, the effect level changes as  
follows;  
DSP EFFECT 1  
DSP EFFECT 4  
DSP EFFECT 2  
DSP EFFECT 5  
DSP EFFECT 3  
(back to the  
]
]
]
]
]
]
beginning)  
As the number increases, the selected mode will be more  
effective. (Normally set the level to “DSP EFFECT 3”.)  
NOTE  
• You cannot adjust the center speaker output level for the DAP modes  
and the effect level for All Channel Stereo.  
• You can output the test tone in any surround mode, or even when  
surround mode is not activated.  
• Speaker output levels whose source signal indicator is lit can be  
TEST  
adjusted without pressing  
.
• When selecting DVD as the source, you can also adjust the speaker  
A
output levels using the choice menu. ( pg. 47)  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced operations  
This section explains advanced operations for disc playback using  
the remote control.  
7 Contents of the on-screen bar during playback  
DVD  
shows the types of discs an operation is  
available for.  
• Turn on your TV and select the correct input mode on the TV.  
NOTE  
• If “ ” appears on the TV screen when pressing a button, the disc  
B
cannot accept an operation you have tried to do or information  
required for that operation is not recorded to the disc.  
Video CD  
SVCD  
CD  
Using the on-screen bar  
You can check disc information while the disc is loaded and you  
can use some functions using the on-screen bar.  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
1 Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO  
.
DVD  
2 Press  
.
Cursor  
(
/
3 2 / 5  
/
/
)
/ENTER  
MP3 disc  
Showing the on-screen bar  
7
Whenever a disc is loaded  
Press ON SCREEN.  
A
Shows disc type.  
Shows current transfer rate (Megabits per second).  
Shows disc number.  
Shows current title (for DVD) or group (for MP3) number.  
Each time you press the button, the on-screen bar changes as  
follows on the TV screen.  
B
C
Example:During DVD playback  
D
E
Shows current chapter number (for DVD) or track number (for  
other type of discs).  
F
G
A
Shows time information. ( pg. 32)  
Shows playback status.  
:
appears during playback.  
/
: appears during fast forward/reverse.  
/
: appears during playback in forward slow-motion/  
reverse slow-motion.  
:
appears when paused.  
:
appears when stopped.  
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
F
A
Select this to change time information ( ). ( pg. 32)  
A
Select this to change audio language or channel. ( pg. 37, 38)  
Select this for Repeat Playback. ( pg. 42)  
A
OFF  
(The on-screen bar disappears)  
A
Select this to change subtitle language. ( pg. 37)  
A
Select this for time search function. ( pg. 34)  
Select this to change view angle. ( pg. 36)  
A
(back to the beginning)  
A
Select this for chapter search function. ( pg. 33)  
A
A
Select this for Program Playback. ( pg. 41)  
Select this for Random Playback. ( pg. 42)  
• The on-screen bar displays “NO-DISC” if no disc is loaded.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced operations  
Example:During DVD playback  
Basic operation on the on-screen bar  
Example:When selecting the Repeat mode of DVD  
(back to the beginning)  
7
1DPurrinegspslayObaNck oSrCwhRileEsEtoNppetdwice.  
• TIME: Elapsed playing time of current chapter/track  
• REM: Remaining time of current chapter/track  
• TOTAL: Elapsed time of disc  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
• The currently selected item shows green.  
• T. REM: Remaining time of disc  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
ON SCREEN  
Press  
.
NOTE  
• While playing a Video CD, SVCD or Audio CD, the hour digit  
indication does not appear.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to move H to  
.
3 Press ENTER.  
The pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
• The current setting appears.  
Playing from a specified  
position on a disc  
You can start playing a title, chapter or track you specify. You can  
also play a disc from specified time.  
4 Press Cursor //5 to select the desired  
Cursor  
option.  
(
/
3 2 / 5  
/
/
)
Each time you press the button, the options change.  
/ENTER  
Locating a desired scene from the DVD  
menu  
DVDs generally have their own menus which show disc  
contents. These menus contain various items such as titles  
of movies, names of songs or artist information, and you  
can display them on the TV screen. You can locate a desired scene  
by using these menus.  
5 Press ENTER.  
The setting changes and the pop-up window disappears.  
7
1WPherneesvesr aTDOVDPisMloEadNedU or MENU.  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
ON SCREEN  
Press  
.
The menu appears on the TV screen.  
NOTE  
Example:  
• See the corresponding pages for details on each function.  
Changing the time information  
You can change the time information  
in the on-screen bar on the TV screen  
and the display window of the center  
unit.  
Normally, a DVD which contains more than one title will have  
7
1DPurrinegspslayObaNck oSrCwhRileEsEtoNppetdwice.  
TOP MENU  
a “title” menu which lists the titles. Press  
the title menu.  
to show  
Some DVDs may also have a different menu which is shown  
MENU  
2 TPhreeosn-sscrCeeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmV oscvreeen.H to  
.
by pressing  
.
See the instructions for each DVD regarding its particular  
2 mUesneu. Cursor 3/2///5 to select a  
3 Press ENTER.  
Each time you press the button, the time information changes  
as follows;  
desired item.  
3 Press ENTER.  
The system starts playback of the selected item.  
• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the  
corresponding number using number buttons.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced operations  
Locating a desired chapter using the on-  
screen bar  
When playing back a DVD, you can locate the chapter  
number to be played using the on-screen bar.  
Cursor  
(
/
/
/
3 2 / 5  
)
/ENTER  
7
1DPurrinegspslayObaNck SCREEN twice.  
2 TPhreeosn-sscCreeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmVoscvreenH. to  
.
Number buttons  
3 Press ENTER.  
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
Locating a desired scene using a Video  
CD/SVCD menu with PBC  
A Video CD or SVCD recorded with PBC has its  
own menus such as a list of contained songs. You  
can locate a specific scene by using these menus.  
4 Press number buttons (0-10) to enter  
the desired chapter number.  
Example:  
8
To select 8: Press  
To select 10: Press  
.
A
(
pg. 4)  
10  
.
2
0
.
7
.
To select 20: Press , then  
7
When the menu appears on the TV screen during playback with  
PBC function  
3
To select 37: Press , then  
Press number buttons (1-10, +10) to select  
the number of the desired item.  
The system starts playback from the selected item.  
To correct a misentry  
Repeat step 4 until the correct number appears in the pop-up  
window.  
5 Press ENTER.  
Example:  
The system starts playback from the selected chapter.  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
ON SCREEN  
Press  
NOTE  
+10  
.
• The  
button is not used by this function.  
• You can select up to the 99th chapter.  
To select the number  
Example:  
To select 3: Press  
To select 11: Press  
Locating a desired title/group using  
number buttons  
3
+10  
.
1
.
, then  
When playing back a disc with more than  
one title or one group, you can specify a  
desired title or group to be played using  
number buttons.  
To return to the menu  
RETURN  
Press  
.
When NEXTor PREVIOUSis shown on the TV  
screen:  
• To go to the next page, press  
• To return to the previous page, press  
1 Press TITLE/GROUP.  
¢
.
“_ _” is shown in the title/group display area in the display  
window.  
4
.
NOTE  
Example:During DVD playback  
• If you want to play a PBC-compatible Video CD/SVCD without  
using the PBC function, perform any of the following:  
Start playback by pressing number buttons while stopped.  
Press repeatedly until the desired track number is displayed,  
¢
then start playback by pressing (play button).  
3
The track number appears on the display window instead of  
“PBC”.  
• To activate the PBC function when playing a PBC-compatible Video  
CD/SVCD without using the PBC function, perform any of the  
following:  
Press TOP MENU or MENU.  
Press twice to stop playback, then press (play button).  
7
3
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced operations  
2 Use number buttons (0-10, +10) to enter  
NOTE  
the desired title or group number.  
• You can also use the 10 button to enter “0”.  
+10  
• The  
button is not used by this function.  
The system starts playback from the first chapter/track/file of  
the selected title/group.  
• You can specify time in hours/minutes/seconds for DVD and in  
minutes/seconds for Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD.  
Example:  
To select 8: Press  
To select 10: Press  
8
10  
.
.
Using the MP3 control  
display  
You can search and play desired groups and tracks using the MP3  
control display.  
+10  
0
.
.
Or press  
, then  
10  
+10  
To select 20: Press  
To select 25: Press  
, then  
+10  
0
.
Or press  
twice, then  
+10  
5
.
twice, then  
TITLE/  
• Specify the number within 5 seconds after pressing  
GROUP  
(i.e. while the display window shows “_ _” for the  
title/group number, instead of the current number).  
You can also specify the desired chapter/track/file by using  
7 MP3 control display  
The MP3 control display appears on the TV screen and playback  
starts when a MP3 disc is selected.  
A
number button. ( pg. 24)  
NOTE  
Total group number on Current track  
disc number  
Total track number in  
current group  
• This function may not work for some DVDs.  
*
Locating a desired position by specifying  
the time  
You can start playing at your desired  
position by specifying the elapsed  
playing time from the beginning of  
the current title (for DVD), or from the beginning of the disc (for  
Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD).  
7
For DVD:  
During playback  
For Video CD/SVCD:  
Current group  
number  
Current track Total track number on  
disc  
While stopped or during playback without PBC function  
For Audio CD:  
During playback or while stopped  
Current group  
Elapsed playing time of current track  
Elapsed playing time is only shown during playback.  
*
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
2 TPhreeosn-sscrCeeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmV oscvreeen.H to  
.
(play button)  
3 Press ENTER.  
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
Cursor  
(
/
3 2 / 5  
/
/
)
/ENTER  
4 Use number buttons (0-9) to enter the  
Number buttons  
time.  
Example:  
To play back from a point 2 (hours): 34 (minutes): 08  
7
During playback  
(seconds) elapsed  
1 Press Cursor //5 to select the desired  
group.  
Press 2  
Press 4  
Press 8  
Press 3  
Press 0  
2 Press Cursor 3 to select the track list.  
3 Press Cursor //5 to select the desired  
track.  
The playback starts from the selected track.  
To correct a misentry  
If you select the track while stopped  
2
Press Cursor  
repeatedly until the wrong number is erased,  
ENTER  
3
Press  
track.  
or (play button) to start playback of the selected  
then press number buttons to enter the correct numbers.  
5 Press ENTER.  
The system starts playback from the specified time.  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
ON SCREEN  
Press  
.
Continued on next page  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced operations  
To select the other group  
2
/ 5  
/
Press Cursor  
to return to the group list, then press Cursor  
to select the desired group.  
(play button)  
To skip groups/tracks during playback  
/
Press Cursor repeatedly for forward-skip.  
Cursor  
5
Press Cursor repeatedly for reverse-skip.  
(
/
3 2 / 5  
/
/
)
/ENTER  
To start playback by specifying the track number  
Press number buttons (0-10, +10) to enter  
the track number.  
Example:  
Number buttons  
3
+10  
To select 3: Press  
To select 14: Press  
To select 20: Press  
.
4
.
twice, then  
, then  
+10  
.
7
While stopped  
0
.
Or press  
+10  
+10  
4
.
To select 24: Press  
To select 110:Press  
twice, then  
ten times, then  
1 Press Cursor //5 to select the desired  
10  
.
group.  
The entered number appears in the track number indication and  
playback starts from the track you have specified.  
2 Press Cursor 3 to select the file list.  
NOTE  
3 Press Cursor //5 to select the desired  
• You can also check playback information on the display window.  
A
(
pg. 22)  
file.  
• Some group and track names may not be displayed correctly  
depending on recording conditions.  
• The order of groups and tracks on an MP3 disc may be displayed  
differently from the order displayed on your personal computer.  
• Up to 12 groups and tracks are displayed at once. Pressing Cursor  
4 Press 3 (play button) to start the slide-  
show playback from the selected file.  
To show only the selected file  
/
repeatedly scrolls the display to show the hidden groups and  
/ 5  
ENTER  
Press  
.
tracks one by one.  
• When a still picture is completely shown on the TV screen, you  
A
can zoom in on areas in the still picture. ( pg. 39)  
To select the other group  
Using the JPEG control  
display  
You can search and show desired groups and files using the JPEG  
control display.  
2
/ 5  
/
Press Cursor  
to return to the group list, then press Cursor  
to select the desired group.  
To start the slide-show playback by specifying the file  
number  
Press number buttons (0-10, +10) to enter  
the file number.  
7 JPEG control display  
The JPEG control display appears on the TV screen when stopping  
playback of a JPEG disc.  
Example:  
3
+10  
+10  
To select 3: Press  
To select 14: Press  
To select 20: Press  
.
Total group number on Current file  
disc number  
Total file number in  
current group  
4
.
10  
, then  
, then  
.
+10  
0
.
Or press  
twice, then  
+10  
+10  
4
To select 24: Press  
To select 110:Press  
twice, then  
ten times, then  
.
10  
.
The entered number appears in the file number indication and the  
slide-show playback starts from the file you have specified.  
To return to the JPEG control display  
Press MENU.  
NOTE  
• Some group and file names may not be displayed correctly depending  
on recording conditions.  
• The order of groups and files on a JPEG disc may be displayed  
differently from the order displayed on your personal computer.  
Current group  
number  
Current group  
Current file  
Total file number on  
disc  
• Up to 12 groups and files are displayed at once. Pressing Cursor  
/
/ 5  
repeatedly scrolls the display to show the hidden groups and files one  
by one.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced operations  
When using the on-screen bar:  
Selecting a view angle of  
DVD  
While playing back a DVD containing multi-view angles, you can  
enjoy the same scene at different angles.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
2 TPhreeosn-sscCreeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmVoscvreeenH. to  
.
3 Press ENTER.  
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
Example:The first view angle is selected out of 3 view angles  
recorded.  
Cursor  
(
/
3 2 / 5  
/
/
)
/ENTER  
4 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
the desired view angle.  
5 EParceh stimseEyoNuTprEesRs t.he button, the angle of the scene changes.  
Selecting a view angle  
The pop-up window disappears.  
7
During playback  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
ON SCREEN  
Press  
.
When using the ANGLE button:  
1 Press ANGLE.  
The following pop-up window appears on the TV screen.  
Example:The first view angle is selected out of 3 view angles  
recorded.  
2 Press ANGLE repeatedly to select the  
desired view angle.  
Each time you press the button, the angle of the scene changes.  
Example:  
1/3  
2/3  
3/3  
(back to the beginning)  
]
]
]
]
The pop-up window disappears if no operation is done for  
about 5 seconds.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced operations  
When using the on-screen bar:  
Selecting the subtitle/  
audio languages  
When playing back a DVD (or SVCD) containing subtitles in  
several languages, you can select the subtitle language to be  
displayed on the TV screen.  
When a DVD contains audio (sound track) in several languages,  
you can also select the language (sound track) to listen to.  
You can also select specific audio channel(s) on Video CDs/  
SVCDs.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
2 TPhreeosn-sscCreeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmVoscvreeenH. to  
.
3 Press ENTER.  
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
Example (DVD):“ENGLISH” is selected out of 3 subtitle  
languages recorded.  
Cursor  
(
/
3 2 / 5  
/
/
)
/ENTER  
4 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
the desired subtitle language.  
5 EParceh stimseEyoNuTprEesRs t.he button, the subtitle language changes.  
The pop-up window disappears.  
Selecting the subtitle language  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
ON SCREEN  
Press  
.
7
During playback  
When using the SUBTITLE button:  
Selecting the audio language  
1 Press SUBTITLE.  
7
During playback  
The following pop-up window appears on the TV screen.  
When using the AUDIO button:  
Example (DVD):“ENGLISH” is selected out of 3 subtitle  
languages recorded.  
1 Press AUDIO.  
The following pop-up window appears on the TV screen.  
Example:ENGLISH” is selected out of 3 audio languages  
recorded.  
2 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select  
the desired subtitle language.  
Each time you press the button, the subtitle language changes.  
2 Press AUDIO repeatedly to select the  
For SVCD  
desired audio language.  
Each time you press the button, the audio languages change.  
The pop-up window disappears if no operation is done for  
about 5 seconds.  
SUBTITLE  
changes the subtitles regardless of whether the  
subtitles are recorded or not. (Subtitles will not change if no  
subtitle is recorded.)  
NOTE  
The pop-up window disappears if no operation is done for  
about 5 seconds.  
• Some audio languages are abbreviated in the pop-up window. See  
A
“The language codes list” ( pg. 46).  
NOTE  
• Some subtitle languages are abbreviated in the pop-up window. See  
When using the on-screen bar:  
A
“The language codes list” ( pg. 46).  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
2 TPhreeosn-sscCreeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmVoscvreeenH. to  
.
3 Press ENTER.  
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
Example:ENGLISH” is selected out of 3 audio languages  
recorded.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced operations  
When using the on-screen bar:  
4 Press Cursor //5 to select the desired  
audio language.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
5 EParceh stimseEyoNuTprEesRs t.he button, the audio language changes.  
2 TPhreeosn-sscCreeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmVoscvreeenH. to  
.
The pop-up window disappears.  
3 Press ENTER.  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
ON SCREEN  
Press  
NOTE  
• Some audio languages are abbreviated in the pop-up window. See  
.
Example:ST” (stereo) is selected out of 3 audio channels  
recorded.  
A
“The language codes list” ( pg. 46).  
Selecting the audio channel  
When you play certain karaoke (Video CD/SVCD),  
you can enjoy karaoke by selecting the audio  
channel to play.  
• The sound of each audio channel depends on the contents of the  
disc.  
4 Press Cursor //5 to select the desired  
audio channel(s).  
5 EParceh stimseEyoNuTprEesRs t.he button, the audio channel changes.  
The pop-up window disappears.  
7
During playback  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
When using the AUDIO button:  
ON SCREEN  
Press  
.
1 Press AUDIO.  
The following pop-up window appears on the TV screen.  
Example:ST” (stereo) is selected out of 3 audio channels  
recorded.  
2 Press AUDIO repeatedly to select the  
desired audio channel.  
Each time you press the button, the audio channel changes.  
Example for Video CD:  
ST  
L
R
(back to the beginning)  
]
]
]
]
• ST: To listen to normal stereo playback.  
• L: To listen to L (left) audio channel only.  
• R: To listen to R (right) audio channel only.  
Example for SVCD:  
ST 1  
ST 2  
L 1  
R 1  
L 2  
R 2  
(back to  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
the beginning)  
• ST 1/ST 2:  
To listen to normal stereo playback of ST 1 or 2 channel.  
• L 1/L 2:  
To listen to L (left) 1 or 2 audio channel.  
• R 1/R 2:  
To listen to R (right) 1 or 2 audio channel.  
The pop-up window disappears if no operation is done for  
about 5 seconds.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced operations  
To return to normal playback  
3
Press (play button).  
Special picture playback  
This system provides special picture playback functions including  
frame-by-frame, slow-motion and zoom.  
NOTE  
• Sound cannot be heard during slow-motion playback.  
Zooming in  
(play button)  
7
1DPurrinegspslayZbaOckOorMw.hile paused  
ZOOM  
Each time you press  
follows;  
, scene magnification changes as  
x 1 (normal size)  
x 1.8 x 4 x 8 x 16  
]
]
]
]
]
]
x 32  
x 64  
(back to the beginning)  
]
]
Cursor  
(
/
3 2 / 5  
/
/
)
Example:When x4 zoom is selected.  
/ENTER  
Current  
magnification  
Frame-by-frame playback  
Zoomed-in  
area  
7
During playback  
8
Press repeatedly.  
Each time you press the button, the still  
picture advances by one frame.  
2 While zoomed in, press Cursor 3/2///  
To return to normal playback  
5
to move zoom-in area.  
3
Press (play button).  
NOTE  
• You can perform the above operation using the buttons on the center  
unit.  
Playing back in slow-motion  
7
1DPurrinegspslay8bacak t the point  
To return to normal playback  
where you want to start playback in  
slow-motion from.  
ENTER  
Press  
NOTE  
• Picture may look coarse while zoomed in.  
.
2 TPhreessysstem¡paus.es playback.  
• Playback in forward slow-motion starts.  
For DVD only:  
1
• To play back in reverse slow-motion, press  
.
Each time you press the button, the playback speed become  
faster and on-screen guide icon changes as follows;  
Forward:  
Reverse:  
To pause slow-motion playback  
8
Press  
.
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced operations  
4 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
Changing the VFP setting  
The VFP (Video Fine Processor) function  
enables you to adjust the picture character  
according to the type of programming,  
picture tone or personal preference.  
a parameter you want to adjust.  
Adjust gradually and confirm picture appearance results are as  
preferred.  
• GAMMA (–4 to +4):  
Controls brightness of neutral tints while maintaining  
brightness of dark and bright portions.  
• BRIGHTNESS (–16 to +16):  
Controls screen brightness.  
• CONTRAST (–16 to +16):  
Controls screen contrast.  
NOTE  
Before you start operation;  
• The VFP setting screen disappears if no operations are done for more  
than about 10 seconds. If the setting screen disappears before you  
finish, start from step 1 again.  
• SATURATION (–16 to +16):  
Controls screen color depth.  
• TINT (–16 to +16):  
Controls screen tint.  
• SHARPNESS (+0 to +3):  
Controls screen sharpness.  
7 To select a VFP mode  
1 Press VFP during playback.  
The current VFP settings appear on the TV screen.  
Example:When “NORMAL” is selected.  
• Y DELAY (–2 to +2):  
Controls screen color gap.  
5 Press ENTER.  
VFP menu disappears and the following pop-up window  
appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 repeatedly to select  
the VFP mode.  
Each time you press the button, the VFP mode changes as  
follows;  
6 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to change  
the setting.  
NORMAL  
CINEMA  
USER 1  
USER 2  
(back  
O
O
O
O
O
to the beginning)  
7 Press ENTER.  
• NORMAL:Normally select this.  
• CINEMA: Suitable for movies.  
• USER 1 and USER 2:  
You can adjust parameters that affect picture appearance and  
store settings. Go to step 3.  
8 TRhee pcuerraentt sVtFePpsesttin4gstoapp7eatroagaaind.just other  
parameters.  
To return to the normal screen  
NOTE  
• You cannot adjust the parameters of “NORMAL” and “CINEMA”.  
VFP  
VFP  
Press  
To activate your setting  
VFP  
.
Press  
to return to normal screen.  
3 2  
/
Press  
, then press Cursor  
repeatedly to select “USER 1”  
7 To adjust picture appearance manually  
or “USER 2” that you have changed the parameters.  
3 Press Cursor 3/2 repeatedly to select  
USER 1or USER 2.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced operations  
Example for 4 A  
Program Playback  
You can play up to 99 titles  
(for DVD) or tracks (for other  
types of discs) in any order  
from among multiple discs. You may program the same title or  
track more than once.  
Example for 4 B  
Selected title/track  
number  
Selected group number  
Selected disc number  
(play button)  
5 Repeat step 4 to program following  
orders.  
Cursor  
(
/
3 2 / 5  
/
/
)
Each time you enter a title/track number in the order at the  
bottom of the program menu, the program menu scrolls and  
the following orders appear.  
/ENTER  
To erase an order  
Press Cursor //5 to move H to the order to be erased, then  
Number buttons  
6 pPrersessCsAN3CE(Lp. lay button) to start Program  
Playback.  
When all of the programmed titles/tracks have been played  
back, playback stops and the program menu appears again.  
Note that program setting remains.  
7 While stopped  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
When playing back an Audio CD:  
The program menu remains on the TV screen during Program  
Playback.  
2 PThreeosn-sscrCeeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmV oscvreeen.H to  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
To check the program contents  
During playback, press 7. Playback stops and the program menu  
appears.  
To bring up the menu without stopping playback, carry out steps 1  
to 3.  
The program menu appears on the TV screen.  
• 10 orders appear at a time.  
You can also check playback status in the on-screen bar by  
pressing ON SCREEN.  
To stop Program Playback  
Press 7. Note that program setting remains.  
To clear the program  
While stopped and the program menu is shown on the TV screen,  
press 7.  
All of the programmed titles/tracks are erased. You can also clear  
the program by turning off the system.  
4 A: When programming titles/tracks of DVD/Video CD/  
SVCD/Audio CD  
Press number buttons (1-10, +10) to  
specify selections by disc and title/  
track.  
• At each program order use number buttons to specify source  
disc number first, press ENTER, then specify title/track  
number on source disc.  
To quit the Program mode  
After clearing all programmed titles/tracks, press 3 (play button).  
The program menu disappears.  
NOTE  
• During Program Playback, you cannot edit program contents.  
• During Program Playback, pressing  
skips to the next program  
¢
Example: To specify “title 3/track 3” of “disc 2”  
Press 2 ] ENTER* ] 3  
* You can also use any number buttons instead of ENTER.  
(A number entered for a group number is invalid.)  
When you specify the currently selected disc number  
(A pg. 23), H skips group number column and moves to  
track number column automatically.  
selection. Pressing  
current selection.  
returns playback to the beginning of the  
4
• The Resume function cannot be used with Program Playback.  
• To close the program menu:  
Press ON SCREEN. The program menu is closed and the on-screen  
bar is shown.  
• To turn off the on-screen bar:  
B: When programming tracks of MP3 disc  
Press number buttons (1-10, +10) to  
specify selections by disc, group and  
track.  
• At each program order use number buttons to specify source  
disc number first, specify group number, then specify track  
number on source disc.  
Press ON SCREEN repeatedly.  
• Program Playback function cannot be used during Video CD/SVCD  
playback with PBC function.  
• If you want to repeat the programmed titles/tracks, set the Repeat  
mode during Program Playback. (A pg. 42)  
• Program Playback may not work for some discs.  
Example: To specify “track 14” in “group 2” of “disc 3”  
Press 3 ] 2 ] +10 ] 4  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced operations  
Repeating the current selection or all  
discs  
Random Playback  
You can play titles or tracks  
on a disc in random order.  
7
For DVD/Audio CD/MP3/JPEG:  
During playback  
For Video CD/SVCD:  
During playback without PBC function  
When using the REPEAT button:  
1 Press REPEAT.  
Cursor  
(
/
3 2 / 5  
/
/
)
REPEAT  
Each time you press  
cyclically.  
, the Repeat mode changes  
/ENTER  
• Repeat mode indicators appear on the display window and a  
repeat mode indication appears on the TV screen.  
7
While stopped  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
2 TPhreeosn-sscrCeeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmV oscvreeen.H to  
.
Repeat mode indicator  
Example: For Audio CD  
Followings are the description of indicators on the display window  
and indications on the TV screen.  
Indicators  
Indications  
Meanings  
REPEAT GROUP  
*
Repeats the current group for  
MP3/JPEG disc.  
3 Press ENTER.  
The system starts Random Playback.  
Repeats the current title for DVD.  
After playing all titles/tracks on the disc, the system stops  
playback and quits the Random mode.  
When more than one discs are loaded, the system starts  
Random Playback of the next disc after completing current  
disc playback.  
Repeats all tracks on the current  
disc for Video CD/SVCD/  
Audio CD/MP3/JPEG.  
REPEAT DISC  
*
Repeats all the available discs.  
REPEAT ALL  
*
To stop and quit Random Playback  
7
Press  
.
1
Repeats the current track for  
Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD/MP3  
disc.  
You can also clear the Random mode by turning off the system.  
REPEAT TRACK  
NOTE  
Repeats the current chapter for  
DVD.  
• The same title/track will not be played back more than once during  
Random Playback.  
• To return to normal playback without stopping playback, carry out  
steps 1 to 3 above.  
No  
indication  
Repeat mode is off.  
The system plays back all  
available discs normally.  
* During playback of a JPEG disc, “REPEAT GROUP”, “REPEAT  
DISC” and “REPEAT ALL” do not appear on the TV screen.  
Repeat Playback  
You can repeat playback of the currently selected title or chapter  
(for DVD), track (for Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD), current group  
(for MP3/JPEG) or track (for MP3).  
To stop Repeat Playback  
7
.
Press  
• When a disc except DVD is selected, the system stops playback  
but does not quit the Repeat mode.  
You can also repeat playback of a desired part.  
• When a DVD is set, the system stops playback and quits the  
Repeat mode.  
To quit the Repeat mode  
REPEAT  
display window.  
Press  
until the Repeat mode indicator goes off from the  
Cursor  
(
/
3 2 / 5  
/
/
)
/ENTER  
You can also clear the Repeat mode by changing the current disc  
except when in repeat all mode (ALL).  
Continued on next page  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced operations  
2 Press A-B REPEAT again at the end of  
NOTE  
• If you press  
REPEAT  
the part you want to repeat (point B).  
while stopped, you need to press (play  
3
button) to start Repeat Playback.  
• When the Program mode is active with a Video CD, SVCD, Audio  
CD, the Repeat mode changes in the same manner.  
The repeat mode indicator on the display window changes to  
” and A-B Repeat Playback starts. The selected  
part of the disc (between point A and B) is played repeatedly.  
Note that, however, in the “  
” mode the system repeats all the  
programmed tracks, instead of all tracks on the disc.  
• During playback in the Repeat mode of the title/chapter/group/track,  
if you skip the title/chapter/group/track using  
/ , etc., the  
¢4  
destination title/chapter/group/track is repeated.  
REPEAT  
• If  
appears when pressing  
during DVD playback, you  
B
To cancel A-B Repeat Playback  
cannot repeat the title or chapter because of disc contents.  
A-B REPEAT  
Press  
during A-B Repeat Playback.  
When using the on-screen bar (except for JPEG  
disc):  
When using the on-screen bar:  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
2 TPhreeosn-sscCreeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe mTVoscvreeenH. to  
.
2 TPhreeosn-sscCreeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe mTVoscvreenH. to  
.
3 Press ENTER.  
3 Press ENTER.  
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
4 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
4 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
A-B.  
the Repeat mode.  
You can select the Repeat modes as follows:  
5 Press ENTER at the beginning of the  
For DVD  
part you want to repeat (point A).  
O CHAPTER O TITLE OALL O A-B O OFF O  
(back to the beginning)  
The following display appears in the on-screen bar.  
For Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD  
O TRACK O DISC O ALL O A-B O OFF O (back to  
the beginning)  
For MP3 disc  
6 Press ENTER at the end of the part you  
O TRACK O GROUP O DISC O ALL O OFF O  
want to repeat (point B).  
5 (Pbraeckstso EthNe TbeEgRin.ning)  
A-B Repeat Playback starts. The selected part of the disc  
(between point A and B) is played repeatedly.  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
ON SCREEN  
Press  
.
ON SCREEN  
Press  
.
To cancel Repeat Playback  
Repeat from step 1, select “OFF” in step 4, then press  
To cancel A-B Repeat Playback  
Repeat from step 1, select “OFF” in step 4, then press  
ENTER  
.
ENTER  
.
NOTE  
Repeating a desired part  
You can repeat playback of a desired  
part by specifying the beginning  
(point A) and ending (point B).  
• When playing back a DVD, A-B Repeat Playback is possible only  
within the same title.  
• “A-B” cannot be selected during Program and Random Playback.  
• “A-B” cannot be selected while stopped.  
7
During playback  
When using the A-B REPEAT button:  
1 Press A-B REPEAT at the beginning of  
the part you want to repeat (point A).  
The repeat mode indicator “  
window.  
” appears on the display  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setting DVD preferences  
You can adjust the initial settings for DVD playback according to  
your preference or needs using 5 choice menus shown on the TV  
screen.  
: Audio menu (AUDIO) (A pg. 47)  
You can adjust sound settings.  
• Adjustments are possible only when selecting DVD as the  
source.  
Using the choice menus  
• Turn on your TV and select the correct input mode on the TV.  
You can only use the remote control for choice menu operations.  
You can change the language used in the choice menus.  
A
(
pg. 46)  
You cannot show the choice menus when an MP3 disc or a JPEG  
disc is accessed.  
: Speaker setting menu (SPK. SETTING)  
(A pg. 47)  
Choice menus  
You can make speaker settings according to the size and layout of  
your speakers.  
You can also adjust the output level of the subwoofer, center  
speaker and surround speakers.  
: Language menu (LANGUAGE) (A pg. 46)  
You can select the initial languages for the disc menu, audio and  
subtitles.  
You can also select the language used on the TV screen while  
operating this system.  
: Other setting menu (OTHERS) (A pg. 49)  
You can change settings for some of the functions. Also use this  
menu to set Parental Lock.  
: Picture menu (PICTURE) (A pg. 47)  
You can select the desired options concerning a picture or monitor  
screen.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting DVD preferences  
4 Press ENTER.  
Basic operation on the choice menus  
The pop-up window, listing the selectable options, appears on  
the choice menu.  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
1 Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO  
.
DVD  
2 Press  
.
Cursor  
3 2 / 5  
/ENTER  
(
/
/
/
)
5 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
the desired option.  
Example:When “FILM” is selected.  
1 Press CHOICE.  
The language menu (LANGUAGE) appears on the TV screen.  
6 Press ENTER.  
Your choice is stored.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 repeatedly to display  
one of the choice menus.  
Each time you press the button, the choice menus change as  
follows;  
LANGUAGE  
PICTURE  
AUDIO  
O
O
O
SPK. SETTING  
beginning)  
OTHERS  
(back to the  
O
O
To set other items on the same choice menu  
Repeat steps 3 to 6.  
Example:When the picture menu (PICTURE) is selected.  
To move to another choice menu  
3 2  
/
Press Cursor  
set up.  
repeatedly to select a choice menu you want to  
To return to the normal screen  
CHOICE  
Press  
NOTE  
• Some items in the choice menus consist of sub-menus to set up.  
.
ENTER  
Selecting these items and pressing  
menu appear on the TV screen. You can set submenus using Cursor  
ENTER  
makes its related sub-  
/
/
/
and  
(as explained in this basic operation).  
3 2 / 5  
3 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to move  
H
to the item you want to set up.  
Example:When “PICTURE SOURCE” is selected.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting DVD preferences  
SUBTITLE  
7
Some DVDs have multiple subtitle languages.  
• Select the initial subtitle language*.  
Menu description  
OFF (no indication of subtitles), ENGLISH, SPANISH,  
FRENCH, CHINESE, GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE and  
language codes from AA to ZU (see below)  
: Language menu (LANGUAGE)  
NOTE  
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE  
• Select the language shown on the TV screen when operating this  
system.  
7
• You can select “MENU LANGUAGE”, “AUDIO LANGUAGE” and  
“SUBTITLE” only while playback is stopped.  
ENGLISH, SPANISH and FRENCH  
MENU LANGUAGE  
7
Some DVDs have their own menus in multiple languages.  
• Select the initial language*.  
* When the language you have selected is not recorded to a disc,  
the original language is automatically used as the initial  
language.  
ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE, GERMAN,  
ITALIAN, JAPANESE and language codes from AA to ZU  
(see below)  
AUDIO LANGUAGE  
7
Some DVDs have multiple audio languages.  
• Select the initial audio language*.  
ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE, GERMAN,  
ITALIAN, JAPANESE and language codes from AA to ZU  
(see below)  
The language codes list  
AA Afar  
GL Galician  
GN Guarani  
GU Gujarati  
HA Hausa  
ML Malayalam  
MN Mongolian  
MO Moldavian  
MR Marathi  
SO Somali  
SQ Albanian  
SR Serbian  
SS Siswati  
ST Sesotho  
SU Sundanese  
SV Swedish  
SW Swahili  
TA Tamil  
AB Abkhazian  
AF Afrikaans  
AM Ameharic  
AR Arabic  
HI Hindi  
MS Malay (MAY)  
MT Maltese  
AS Assamese  
AY Aymara  
AZ Azerbaijani  
BA Bashkir  
BE Byelorussian  
BG Bulgarian  
BH Bihari  
HR Croatian  
HU Hungarian  
HY Armenian  
IA Interlingua  
IE Interlingue  
IK Inupiak  
IN Indonesian  
IS Icelandic  
IW Hebrew  
MY Burmese  
NA Nauru  
NE Nepali  
NL Dutch  
TE Telugu  
TG Tajik  
NO Norwegian  
OC Occitan  
TH Thai  
BI Bislama  
BN Bengali, Bangla  
BO Tibetan  
BR Breton  
OM (Afan) Oromo  
OR Oriya  
TI Tigrinya  
TK Turkmen  
TL Tagalog  
TN Setswana  
TO Tonga  
TR Turkish  
TS Tsonga  
TT Tatar  
JI  
Yiddish  
PA Panjabi  
JW Javanese  
KA Georgian  
KK Kazakh  
PL Polish  
CA Catalan  
CO Corsican  
CS Czech  
PS Pashto, Pushto  
PT Portuguese  
QU Quechua  
RM Rhaeto-Romance  
RN Kirundi  
KL Greenlandic  
KM Cambodian  
KN Kannada  
KO Korean (KOR)  
KS Kashmiri  
KU Kurdish  
CY Welsh  
DA Danish  
DZ Bhutani  
EL Greek  
TW Twi  
RO Rumanian  
RU Russian  
UK Ukrainian  
UR Urdu  
EO Esperanto  
ET Estonian  
EU Basque  
FA Persian  
FI Finnish  
FJ Fiji  
RW Kinyarwanda  
SA Sanskrit  
SD Sindhi  
UZ Uzbek  
VI Vietnamese  
VO Volapuk  
WO Wolof  
XH Xhosa  
YO Yoruba  
ZU Zulu  
KY Kirghiz  
LA Latin  
LN Lingala  
SG Sangho  
LO Laothian  
LT Lithuanian  
LV Latvian, Lettish  
MG Malagasy  
MI Maori  
SH Serbo-Croatian  
SI Singhalese  
SK Slovak  
FO Faroese  
FY Frisian  
SL Slovenian  
SM Samoan  
GA Irish  
GD Scots Gaelic  
MK Macedonian  
SN Shona  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Setting DVD preferences  
: Picture menu (PICTURE)  
MONITOR TYPE  
: Audio menu (AUDIO)  
L/R BALANCE  
7
7
You can select the monitor type to match your TV when you play  
DVDs recorded in the picture’s height/width ratio of 16:9.  
16:9 NORMAL (Wide television conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is fixed to 16:9  
(wide TV).  
You can adjust the balance between the front left and front right  
speakers.  
L-21 to L-1  
CENTER  
R-1 to R-21 (by 1 step)  
O
O
• CENTER  
The levels of the front left and right speakers are identical.  
• L-21 to L-1 and R-1 to R-21  
As the number increases, the level from one speaker lowered  
than that of the other speaker. (When you select “-21”, no  
sound comes out from the selected (L or R) speaker.)  
The system automatically adjusts the screen width of the  
output signal correctly when playing back a picture whose  
aspect ratio is 4:3.  
16:9 AUTO (Wide television conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide  
TV).  
BASS  
7
You can adjust the enhancement level for bass sound from the front  
speakers.  
4:3 LB (Letter Box conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3  
(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the  
black bars appear on the top and the bottom of the screen.  
4:3 PS (Pan Scan conversion)  
Within the range from 10 to +10. (by 2 step)  
TREBLE  
7
You can adjust the enhancement level for treble sound from the  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3  
(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the  
black bars do not appear, however, the left and right edges of  
the pictures will not be shown on the screen.  
front speakers.  
Within the range from 10 to +10. (by 2 step)  
NOTE  
• You can adjust bass/treble enhancement level only for front left/right  
channel. However, the supplied speakers cannot add the effective  
change to the bass sound because of their cutoff frequency even if the  
A
bass sound adjustment is made. ( pg. 48)  
To change the bass enhancement level more efficiently, adjust the  
Ex.: 16:9  
Ex.: 4:3 LB  
Ex.: 4:3 PS  
A
output level of the subwoofer. ( pg. 19)  
(When you change the front speakers to the larger ones and select  
NOTE  
A
“LARGE” for the front speakers in the SIZE sub-menu ( pg. 48),  
• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become “4:3 LB”  
with some DVDs. This depends on how DVDs are recorded.  
• When you select “16:9 NORMAL” for a picture whose aspect ratio is  
4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the process for converting the  
picture width.  
the effective adjustment of bass sound is also possible.)  
LFE ATT.  
7
The Low Frequency Effect attenuater diminishes distortion of the  
bass sound from the subwoofer when playing back a disc with  
PICTURE SOURCE  
7
Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround.  
ON  
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting whether the  
content on the disc is processed by field (video source) or by frame  
(film source).  
Select this to diminish distortion of the bass sound from the  
subwoofer.  
OFF  
Normally set to AUTO”.  
Select this to deactivate the function.  
VIDEO (NORMAL)  
Suitable for playing back a video source disc with relatively a  
few movements.  
D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
(Dynamic range compression)  
You can enjoy low level recorded sound clearly at night even at a  
low volume when listening to the sound with Dolby Digital.  
7
VIDEO (ACTIVE)  
Suitable for playing back a video source disc with relatively a  
lot of movements.  
FILM  
Suitable for playing back a film source disc.  
AUTO  
Used to play a disc containing both video and film source  
materials.  
This system recognizes the source type (video or film) of the  
current disc according to the disc information.  
• If the playback picture is unclear or noisy, or the oblique  
lines of the picture are rough, try to change to other modes.  
MAX  
Select this when you want to fully apply the compression  
effect (useful at midnight).  
MID  
Select this when you want to reduce the dynamic range a  
little.  
OFF  
Select this when you want to enjoy surround sound with its  
full dynamic range (no effect applied).  
SCREEN SAVER  
You can activate or deactivate the screen saver function. ( pg. 22)  
7
: Speaker setting menu  
(SPK. SETTING)  
A
ON  
The picture on the TV screen becomes dark.  
OFF  
Select this to deactivate the function.  
SIZE  
7
Accesses the SIZE sub-menu (speaker size setting  
menu). (See following.)  
LEVEL  
MP3/JPEG  
7
7
7
Accesses the LEVEL sub-menu (speaker level setting  
menu). (See following.)  
If both MP3 files and JPEG files are recorded on a disc, you can  
select which files to play.  
MP3  
DISTANCE  
Accesses the DISTANCE sub-menu (speaker distance  
setting menu). (See following.)  
Select this to play MP3 files.  
JPEG  
Select this to play JPEG files.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                             
Setting DVD preferences  
CROSS OVER*  
7
7 Level menu (LEVEL)  
CENTER SPEAKER* SURROUND LEFT SPEAKER*  
Small speakers cannot reproduce bass sounds efficiently. If you use  
a small speaker in any position, this system automatically  
reallocates the bass sound elements assigned to the small speaker to  
one of the large speakers.  
To use this function properly, set crossover frequency level  
according to the size of the smallest speaker connected.  
200 Hz  
/
/
Adjust the output level of related speakers.  
Within the range from 10 dB to +10 dB.  
TEST TONE**  
Outputs the test tone.  
Select this when the cone speaker unit in the smallest speaker  
connected is about 4 cm in diameter (1-5/8 inches).  
150 Hz (Select this when using the supplied speakers.)  
Select this when the cone speaker unit in the smallest speaker  
connected is about 6 cm in diameter (2-3/8 inches).  
120 Hz  
Select this when the cone speaker unit in the smallest speaker  
connected is about 8 cm in diameter (3-3/16 inches).  
100 Hz  
Select this when the cone speaker unit in the smallest speaker  
connected is about 10 cm in diameter (3-15/16 inches).  
80 Hz  
Select this when the cone speaker unit in the smallest speaker  
connected is about 12 cm in diameter (4-3/4 inches).  
RETURN  
Returns to the SPK. SETTING menu.  
* • You cannot select “CENTER SPEAKER” when one of the  
A
DAP modes ( pg. 27) is selected as the surround mode.  
A
(
pg. 29)  
You cannot select “CENTER SPEAKER”, “SURROUND  
LEFT SPEAKER” and “SURROUND RIGHT SPEAKER”  
when the surround mode is off (stereo). ( pg. 29)  
** The test tone comes out of all of the activated speakers in the  
A
following sequence:  
Front left speaker  
Center speaker  
Front right  
Surround left  
]
]
]
speaker  
speaker  
Surround right speaker  
(back to the beginning)  
]
]
]
* If you have selected “LARGE” for all speakers in the SIZE  
menu, this function will not take effect.  
7 Distance menu (DISTANCE)  
Example:  
RETURN TO INITIAL  
7
Center  
speaker  
Resets all speaker settings to the initial settings.  
7 Size menu (SIZE)  
Subwoofer  
Front right  
3.0 m  
CAUTION  
Front left  
• When using the supplied speakers, select “SMALL” for each.  
Selecting “LARGE” may damage the speakers.  
2.7 m  
2.4 m  
2.1 m  
NOTE  
• When “SMALL” is selected for the front speakers, you cannot select  
“LARGE” for the center speaker and surround speakers.  
FRONT SPEAKER/CENTER SPEAKER/SURROUND  
SPEAKER  
Surround left  
Surround right  
Select the speaker size according to the actual size of your  
speakers.  
In this case, set the distance of each speaker as follows;  
LARGE  
• Distance of front speakers:  
• Distance of center speaker:  
3.0 m/10 ft  
2.7 m/9 ft  
Select this when the cone speaker unit in the speaker is larger  
than 12 cm in diameter (4-3/4 inches).  
SMALL (Select this when using the supplied speakers.)  
Select this when the cone speaker unit in the speaker is  
smaller than 12 cm in diameter (4-3/4 inches).  
• Distance of surround speakers: 2.4 m/8 ft  
FRONT SPEAKER/CENTER SPEAKER/SURROUND  
SPEAKER  
SUB WOOFER  
USE  
Adjust the distance from the listening position to the speakers.  
Within the range from 0.3 m/1 ft to 9.0 m/30 ft. (by 0.3 m/  
1 ft)  
This item is fixed to “USE”.  
TEST TONE*  
RETURN  
Outputs the test tone.  
Returns to the SPK. SETTING menu.  
RETURN  
Returns to the SPK. SETTING menu.  
* The test tone comes out of all of the activated speakers in the  
following sequence:  
Front left speaker  
Center speaker  
Front right  
]
]
]
speaker  
speaker  
Surround right speaker  
(back to the beginning)  
Surround left  
]
]
]
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Setting DVD preferences  
: Other setting menu (OTHERS)  
Parental Lock  
Using this function, you can restrict playback of a DVD containing  
violent scenes or scenes not suitable for your other family  
members. Nobody can play such a disc unless this function is  
canceled.  
• This setting takes effect only for DVDs containing the Parental  
Lock level information — Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8  
(least restrictive).  
NOTE  
• You can select “PARENTAL LOCK” only while playback is  
stopped.  
7 RESUME  
You can activate or deactivate Resume Playback function.  
• ON  
Select this to activate the function.  
You can set the Parental Lock only when playback is stopped.  
• OFF  
Select this to deactivate the function.  
Cursor  
7 ON SCREEN GUIDE  
You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons.  
(A pg. 22)  
(
/
/
/
3 2 / 5  
)
/ENTER  
• ON  
Select this to activate the function.  
• OFF  
Number buttons  
Select this to deactivate the function.  
7 AUTO STANDBY*  
When playback ends and does not restart for more than the time  
you specify, this system turns off by itself.  
Setting Parental Lock  
• 60  
This system turns off by itself if playback does not restart  
within 60 minutes.  
1 Press CHOICE.  
• 30  
3 2  
/
2 Press Cursor  
to display the  
This system turns off by itself if playback does not restart  
within 30 minutes.  
OTHERS menu.  
• OFF  
/ 5  
/
3 Press Cursor  
repeatedly to move  
Select this to deactivate the function.  
H
to “PARENTAL LOCK”, then press  
* When both the Auto Standby function and the Sleep Timer are  
activated, if the shut-off time set by the Sleep Timer comes  
earlier than the one set by the Auto Standby function, the Sleep  
Timer controls shut-off time.  
ENTER.  
The PARENTAL LOCK sub-menu appears on the TV screen.  
7 PARENTAL LOCK  
You can restrict playback of a DVD containing violent scenes that  
is not suitable for your other family members.  
Accesses the PARENTAL LOCK sub-menu. (See  
following “Parental Lock”.)  
/ 5  
/
4 Press Cursor  
repeatedly to move  
H
to “COUNTRY CODE”, then press  
ENTER.  
/ 5  
/
5 Press Cursor  
repeatedly to select  
the country code, then press ENTER.  
See “Country/Area codes list for Parental Lock” (A pg. 51).  
The H moves to “SET LEVEL”.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Setting DVD preferences  
6 Press ENTER.  
4 Press number buttons (0-9) to enter  
your password, then press ENTER.  
• If you enter a wrong password, “WRONG! RETRY...”  
appears under the PARENTAL LOCK sub-menu. You  
cannot go to the next steps before you enter the correct  
password.  
5 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to move  
H to the item you want to change, then  
press ENTER.  
7 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
the level of restriction, then press  
ENTER.  
6 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to change  
the setting, then press ENTER.  
7 Press number buttons (0-9) to enter  
The H moves to “PASSWORD”.  
your password, then press ENTER.  
• Select “NONE” to cancel this function.  
The new setting is stored.  
NOTE  
• You cannot set the Parental Lock before you set your password.  
• If you go out of the PARENTAL LOCK sub-menu before setting your  
password in step 6, the new country code and parental lock level will  
not become effective. The old country code and parental level will  
remain in effect.  
• When you enter wrong passwords more than three times, the  
H
moves to “EXIT” automatically and Cursor  
/
do not work. Press  
/ 5  
ENTER to exit from the PARENTAL LOCK sub-menu, then repeat  
from step 1.  
• If you forget your password, enter “8888”.  
8 Press number buttons (0-9) to enter a  
four-digit number as your password,  
then press ENTER.  
9 TPhreeHssmoEveNs TtoEERX.IT”.  
Releasing Parental Lock temporarily  
When you set a strict parental level, some discs may not be played  
back at all. When you load such a disc and try to play it, the  
following display appears on the TV screen. You can temporarily  
release the Parental Lock.  
The OTHERS menu resumes.  
To return to the normal screen  
Press CHOICE.  
NOTE  
• Remember your password, or make a note of it.  
Changing the Parental Lock setting  
1 Press CHOICE.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to display the  
OTHERS menu.  
1 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to move  
H to “TEMPORARY RELEASE”, then  
press ENTER.  
3 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to move  
H to “PARENTAL LOCK”, then press  
ENTER.  
The H moves to “PASSWORD”.  
• When selecting “NOT RELEASE”, press one of 0 buttons  
on the center unit to remove the disc.  
The PARENTAL LOCK sub-menu appears on the TV screen.  
You can only move H to “PASSWORD” or to “EXIT”  
before you enter your password.  
2 Press number buttons (0-9) to enter  
your password.  
Playback starts.  
• If you enter a wrong password, “WRONG! RETRY...”  
appears under the PARENTAL LOCK sub-menu. You  
cannot play the disc before you enter the correct password.  
NOTE  
• When you enter wrong passwords more than three times, the  
H
moves to “NOT RELEASE” automatically and Cursor  
/
do not  
/ 5  
work. Press one of buttons on the center unit to remove the disc.  
0
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting DVD preferences  
Country/Area codes list for Parental Lock  
AD Andorra  
ER Eritrea  
ES Spain  
RW Rwanda  
Lao People’s Democratic  
Republic  
LA  
AE United Arab Emirates  
AF Afghanistan  
SA Saudi Arabia  
SB Solomon Islands  
SC Seychelles  
SD Sudan  
ET Ethiopia  
LB Lebanon  
AG Antigua and Barbuda  
FI  
FJ  
Finland  
Fiji  
LC Saint Lucia  
AI  
Anguilla  
LI  
Liechtenstein  
AL Albania  
FK Falkland Islands (Malvinas)  
LK Sri Lanka  
LR Liberia  
SE Sweden  
AM Armenia  
SG Singapore  
SH Saint Helena  
Micronesia (Fedelated States  
FM  
of)  
AN Netherlands Antilles  
AO Angola  
LS Lesotho  
FO Faroe Islands  
FR France  
LT Lithuania  
LU Luxembourg  
LV Latvia  
SI  
SJ  
Slovenia  
AQ Antarctica  
AR Argentina  
AS American Samoa  
AT Austria  
Svalbard and Jan Mayen  
FX France, Metropolitan  
GA Gabon  
SK Slovakia  
LY Libyan Arab Jamahiriya  
MA Morocco  
SL Sierra Leone  
SM San Marino  
SN Senegal  
GB United Kingdom  
GD Grenada  
AU Australia  
MC Monaco  
AW Aruba  
GE Georgia  
MD Moldova, Republic of  
MG Madagascar  
MH Marshall Islands  
ML Mali  
SO Somalia  
AZ Azerbaijan  
BA Bosnia and Herzegovina  
BB Barbados  
GF French Guiana  
GH Ghana  
SR Suriname  
ST Sao Tome and Principe  
SV El Salvador  
SY Syrian Arab Republic  
SZ Swaziland  
GI  
Gibraltar  
BD Bangladesh  
BE Belgium  
GL Greenland  
GM Gambia  
MM Myanmar  
MN Mongolia  
MO Macau  
BF Burkina Faso  
BG Bulgaria  
GN Guinea  
TC Turks and Caicos Islands  
TD Chad  
GP Guadeloupe  
GQ Equatorial Guinea  
GR Greece  
MP Northern Mariana Islands  
MQ Martinique  
MR Mauritania  
MS Montserrat  
MT Malta  
BH Bahrain  
TF French Southern Territories  
TG Togo  
BI  
BJ  
Burundi  
Benin  
TH Thailand  
South Georgia and the South  
Sandwich Islands  
GS  
BM Bermuda  
TJ  
Tajikistan  
BN Brunei Darussalam  
BO Bolivia  
GT Guatemala  
GU Guam  
MU Mauritius  
MV Maldives  
TK Tokelau  
TM Turkmenistan  
TN Tunisia  
BR Brazil  
GW Guinea-Bissau  
GY Guyana  
MW Malawi  
BS Bahamas  
MX Mexico  
TO Tonga  
BT Bhutan  
HK Hong Kong  
MY Malaysia  
TP East Timor  
TR Turkey  
BV Bouvet Island  
BW Botswana  
BY Belarus  
MZ Mozambique  
NA Namibia  
Heard Island and McDonald  
Islands  
HM  
TT Trinidad and Tobago  
TV Tuvalu  
HN Honduras  
HR Croatia  
HT Haiti  
NC New Caledonia  
NE Niger  
BZ Belize  
TW Taiwan  
CA Canada  
NF Norfolk Island  
NG Nigeria  
TZ Tanzania, United Republic of  
UA Ukraine  
CC Cocos (Keeling) Islands  
CF Central African Republic  
CG Congo  
HU Hungary  
ID  
IE  
IL  
IN  
IO  
IQ  
IR  
IS  
Indonesia  
Ireland  
Israel  
NI  
Nicaragua  
UG Uganda  
NL Netherlands  
NO Norway  
NP Nepal  
United States Minor Outlying  
Islands  
UM  
CH Switzerland  
CI  
Côte d’Ivoire  
India  
US United States  
CK Cook Islands  
CL Chile  
British Indian Ocean Territory NR Nauru  
UY Uruguay  
Iraq  
NU Niue  
UZ Uzbekistan  
CM Cameroon  
CN China  
Iran (Islamic Republic of)  
NZ New Zealand  
OM Oman  
VA Vatican City State (Holy See)  
Iceland  
Italy  
Saint Vincent and the  
Grenadines  
VC  
CO Colombia  
CR Costa Rica  
CU Cuba  
IT  
PA Panama  
JM Jamaica  
PE Peru  
VE Venezuela  
JO  
JP  
Jordan  
Japan  
PF French Polynesia  
PG Papua New Guinea  
PH Philippines  
PK Pakistan  
VG Virgin Islands (British)  
CV Cape Verde  
CX Christmas Island  
CY Cyprus  
VI  
Virgin Islands (U.S.)  
KE Kenya  
VN Vietnam  
KG Kyrgyzstan  
KH Cambodia  
VU Vanuatu  
CZ Czech Republic  
DE Germany  
DJ Djibouti  
PL Poland  
WF Wallis and Futuna Islands  
WS Samoa  
KI  
Kiribati  
PM Saint Pierre and Miquelon  
PN Pitcairn  
KM Comoros  
YE Yemen  
DK Denmark  
DM Dominica  
DO Dominican Republic  
DZ Algeria  
KN Saint Kitts and Nevis  
PR Puerto Rico  
PT Portugal  
YT Mayotte  
YU Yugoslavia  
ZA South Africa  
ZM Zambia  
Korea, Democratic People’s  
Republic of  
KP  
PW Palau  
KR Korea, Republic of  
KW Kuwait  
PY Paraguay  
QA Qatar  
EC Ecuador  
ZR Zaire  
EE Estonia  
KY Cayman Islands  
KZ Kazakhstan  
RE Réunion  
ZW Zimbabwe  
EG Egypt  
RO Romania  
EH Western Sahara  
RU Russian Federation  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System setting  
You can adjust the sound and speaker settings of this system.  
• The adjustments on a source take effect for the other sources.  
• BAL:  
You can adjust the balance between the front left and front  
A
right speakers. ( pg. 47)  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
• D. COMP (Dynamic Range Compression):  
You can enjoy low level recorded sound clearly at night even  
at a low volume level when listening to the sound with  
Dolby Digital. (A pg. 47)  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO  
.
• AUDIO POS (Audio Position):  
Set the audio position of subwoofer so that the subwoofer  
level can be automatically adjusted properly. (The smaller  
the number becomes, the more the level decreases  
automatically when listening in stereo.)  
Cursor  
(
/
/
3 2 / 5  
/
)
• M. OUT (Monitor Out):  
Select the video output jack type by which you watch DVD  
A
playback after connecting your TV. ( pg. 8)  
Set the video output to use AV COMPU LINK remote  
A
control system. ( pg. 53)  
VIDEO: To watch DVD playback via the VIDEO jack.  
S:  
COMPNT (component):  
To watch DVD playback via the COMPONENT  
To watch DVD playback via the S-VIDEO jack.  
NOTE  
Before you start operation;  
• There is a time limit when doing the following steps. If the setting is  
cancelled before you finish, start from step 1 again.  
• When selecting DVD as the source, the settings of the corresponding  
items in the choice menus also change.  
VIDEO OUT jacks.  
3 Press Cursor 3/2 to make an  
adjustment or selection.  
Example:  
On the remote control:  
1 Press SETTING.  
The item you last selected appears on the display window.  
Example:BAL” has been selected.  
• FRNT SP, CNTR SP, SURR SP:  
SML(small)  
LRG(large)  
O
• FRNT D, CNTR D, SURR D:  
Within the range between 1 ft and 30 ft. (by 1 ft step)  
• CROSS:  
2 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
80Hz”  
100Hz”  
120Hz”  
150Hz”  
200Hz”  
O
O
O
O
the item you want to set.  
(back to the beginning)  
O
Each time you press the button, the items shown on the display  
window change as follows:  
• LFE ATT.:  
ON”  
OFF”  
O
FRNT SP  
CNTR SP  
SURR SP  
FRNT D  
O
O
O
O
O
• BAL:  
L-21to L-1”  
CNTR D  
SURR D  
CROSS  
LFE ATT.  
BAL  
O
O
O
O
O
CENTER”  
OFF”  
R-1to R-21”  
O
O
D. COMP  
AUDIO POS  
M. OUT  
(back to the  
O
O
O
• D. COMP:  
beginning)  
MID”  
MAX”  
(back to the beginning)  
(back to the beginning)  
O
O
O
See the corresponding pages for details on the related  
adjustments except for “AUDIO POS” and “M. OUT”.  
• AUDIO POS:  
0”  
“–2”  
“–4” “–6”  
O
O
O
O
• M. OUT:  
CNTR SP (center speaker),  
SURR SP (surround speakers):  
VIDEO”  
S”  
COMPNT”  
(back to the  
O
O
O
beginning)  
A
Select the size of each speaker. ( pg. 48)  
• FRNT D (front speakers distance),  
CNTR D (center speaker distance),  
SURR D (surround speakers distance):  
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other items.  
NOTE  
• If you selected “SML” for the front speakers, you cannot select  
“LRG” for the center and surround speakers.  
• You can confirm your adjustment of speaker settings by listening to  
Adjust distance from the listening position to the speakers.  
A
(
pg. 48)  
• CROSS:  
TEST  
A
the test tone. To output the test tone, press  
. ( pg. 30)  
A
Select the cutoff frequency of the subwoofer. ( pg. 48)  
• LFE ATT.:  
Diminish the distortion of the bass sound from the  
subwoofer while playing back a disc with Dolby Digital or  
A
DTS Digital Surround. ( pg. 47)  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
AV COMPU LINK remote control system  
The AV COMPU LINK remote  
control system allows you to operate  
NOTE  
• To correctly use the automatic selection of TV input mode, select the  
correct “M. OUT” setting. ( pg. 52)  
JVC TVs and VCRs through the center unit. This system is  
equipped with the AV COMPU LINK-III, which adds a function to  
operate JVC’s video components via the video components  
terminals. To use this remote control system, you need to connect  
the video components you want to operate as follows.  
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your TV and video  
components.  
A
Available functions  
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to use  
the functions listed following.  
One-touch video play  
Simply by inserting a video cassette without its safety tab into the  
VCR, you can enjoy video playback without manually setting other  
switches. This system automatically turns on and changes the  
source to VCR.  
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the  
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.  
When you insert a video cassette with its safety tab in place, press  
Connecting a TV and VCR  
CAUTION  
Before connecting;  
• If you have already plugged your VCR, TV and the center unit into  
the AC outlets, unplug their AC power cords first.  
3
the play ( ) button on the VCR or on the remote control to get the  
1 Connect the center unit to a TV and  
same result.  
VCR.  
One-touch DVD play  
2 CFoonr dneetacilst, tsheeepacgee 8natnedr1u2.nit to a TV and VCR  
using the optional AV COMPU LINK  
cords.  
Simply by starting playback on the built-in DVD player, you can  
enjoy playback without manually setting other switches. The TV  
automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the  
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.  
Automatic selection of TV input mode  
When you select DVD or VCR as the source to play on the system,  
the TV automatically changes the input mode to the appropriate  
position so that you can view the playback picture.  
Automatic Power On/Off  
The TV and VCR turn on and off along with the system.  
When you turn on the system;  
• If the previously selected source is “DVD”, only the TV will turn  
on automatically.  
• If the previously selected source is “VCR”, the TV and VCR will  
turn on automatically.  
When you turn off the system, the TV and VCR will turn off.  
NOTE  
• If you turn off the system while recording on the VCR, the VCR will  
not turn off and will continue recording.  
AV COMPU LINK cord  
(not supplied)  
TV  
VCR  
3 Plug the AC power cords of the VCR, TV  
and the center unit into the AC outlets.  
4 Turn on the connected components  
first, then turn on the center unit.  
• When turning on the TV for the first time after the AV  
COMPU LINK connection, turn the TV volume to  
minimum using the TV volume control on the TV.  
• When turning on the VCR, use the remote control supplied  
F VCR/DBS  
.)  
with this system. (Press  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
References  
To clean the disc  
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
DO NOT use any solvent such as  
conventional record cleaner, spray,  
thinner or benzine to clean the disc.  
Maintenance  
To get the best performance out of this system, keep your discs and  
mechanism clean.  
7 General Notes  
7 Cleaning the system  
In general, you will have the best performance by keeping your  
discs and the mechanism clean.  
• Stains on the system should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the  
system is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-  
diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a  
dry cloth.  
• Store discs in their cases and keep them in cabinets or on shelves.  
7 Handling Discs  
• Since the system may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or  
get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following.  
• Remove the disc from its case by holding it at  
the edge while pressing the center hole lightly.  
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc or  
bend the disc.  
DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.  
DO NOT wipe it strong.  
DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.  
DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it.  
DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact with  
it for a long time.  
• Put the disc back in its case after use to  
prevent warping.  
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the  
disc when placing it back in its case.  
Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature  
extremes and moisture.  
Trouble shooting  
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If there is any problem you cannot solve, contact your JVC service center.  
General  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
A
Power does not come  
on.  
The power cord is not connected to the center unit or an Connect the power cord correctly. ( pg. 13)  
AC outlet.  
Power is not supplied to The power cord of the subwoofer is not connected to an Turn off the system, plug the power cord firmly into an  
A
the powered subwoofer. AC outlet.  
AC outlet, and turn on the system again. ( pg. 13, 17)  
The system cord is not connected.  
Connect the system cord. ( pg. 10)  
The system does not  
work correctly.  
Lightning or electronic noise interferes with operation Switch the power off, then disconnect/reconnect the  
of the microcomputer.  
power plug.  
Immediately after beginning to heat the room, the  
system was moved to a cold location causing  
condensation to form inside.  
Switch the power off and leave the system a few hours  
before switching the power on again.  
The remote control does It is too far from the center unit, or is not facing the  
Move closer to the center unit. (Operate the remote  
control within 7 m (23 ft) of the center unit.)  
not work.  
center unit.  
A
(
pg. 14)  
A
There is something obstructing the remote sensor.  
Remove any obstacles. ( pg. 14)  
The remote control is not aimed at the remote sensor on Aim the remote control at the remote sensor on the  
A
the center unit or components.  
equipment you want to operate. ( pg. 14)  
The remote control mode selector is set at an incorrect Set the selector to the correct position. ( pg. 17)  
position.  
A
The batteries are exhausted.  
Replace the batteries. ( pg. 14)  
A
The batteries have been inserted the wrong way round Insert the batteries correctly. ( pg. 14)  
(+/–).  
DVD  
The remote control is not set to operate the DVD player For the DVD player, press  
before you perform the  
A
or tuner (FM/AM).  
operations. ( pg. 21)  
FM/AM  
For the tuner, press  
before you perform the  
A
operations. ( pg. 25)  
Sunlight is falling directly on the remote sensor.  
The remote control signals are not set correctly.  
Hide the remote sensor from direct sunlight.  
A
Enter the correct manufacturer’s code. ( pg. 15, 16)  
Continued on next page  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
References  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
The system cord and/or speaker cord is not connected. Check the connection. ( pg. 10 – 11)  
There is a short in the speaker cord. Reconnect the speaker cord.  
SOLUTION  
A
No sound.  
A
The audio cord is not connected to AUDIO IN (VCR) Connect the cord correctly. ( pg. 12)  
and/or DIGITAL IN (DBS) correctly.  
A
An incorrect source has been selected.  
Muting is on.  
Select the correct source. ( pg. 18)  
MUTING  
A
Press  
to cancel muting. ( pg. 18)  
A
The decode mode is not set correctly.  
The speaker cord is not connected correctly.  
Select the proper decode mode. ( pg. 20)  
A
Sound from one front  
speaker only.  
Connect the speaker cord correctly. ( pg. 10)  
A
Left-right balance is not set properly.  
The speaker setting is incorrect.  
Adjust the balance properly. ( pg. 47, 52)  
A
No sound from the  
center and/or surround  
speakers.  
Set the speaker setting properly. ( pg. 47, 52)  
A
Bass sound is heard  
reinforced when  
Appropriate bass level for stereo sound is not selected. Set “AUDIO POS” properly. ( pg. 52)  
listening in stereo.  
DVD Playback  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
A
No picture is displayed The video cord is not connected correctly.  
on the TV screen.  
Connect the cord correctly. ( pg. 8)  
TV input selection is incorrect.  
The disc is not playable.  
Select the correct input on the TV.  
A
Use a playable disc. ( pg. 3)  
A
No picture is displayed The scan mode is set to “PROGRESSIVE” though the Change the scan mode to “INTERLACE”. ( pg. 20)  
on the TV screen, the center unit is connected to the TV which does not  
picture is blurred, or the support the progressive video input such as a  
picture is divided into  
two parts.  
conventional TV.  
A
A disc cannot be played. The center unit’s and disc’s Region Code numbers are Replace the disc. ( pg. 3)  
incompatible.  
Parental Lock is in use.  
Enter password to change the Parental Lock level.  
A
(
pg. 49)  
A
A disc cannot be played The disc is loaded with its label and data sides inverted. Load the disc correctly. ( pg. 21)  
and “0:00” is displayed  
on the display window.  
A
The unplayable disc is loaded.  
The disc is scratched or dirty.  
Replace the disc. ( pg. 3)  
A
Video and audio are  
distorted.  
Replace or clean the disc. ( pg. 2)  
A
A VCR is connected between the center unit and the  
TV.  
Connect the center unit and TV directly. ( pg. 8)  
With some discs, a picture may be blurred when setting Set “PICTURE SOURCE” to “VIDEO (NORMAL)” or  
A
“PICTURE SOURCE” to “FILM” or “AUTO”.  
“VIDEO (ACTIVE)”. ( pg. 47)  
A
The picture does not fit The monitor type is not set correctly.  
the TV screen.  
Set “MONITOR TYPE” properly. ( pg. 47)  
The TV is not set correctly.  
Set the TV properly.  
No subtitle appears on  
the TV screen though  
Some DVDs are programmed to always display no  
SUBTITLE  
subtitle initially. If this happens, press  
on  
A
you have selected a  
certain language as your  
initial subtitle language.  
the remote control after starting play. ( pg. 37)  
Audio language is  
different from the one  
you have selected as  
your initial audio  
language.  
Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original  
AUDIO  
language initially. If this happens, press  
on the  
A
remote control after starting play. ( pg. 37)  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
MP3 Playback  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
A disc cannot be played. No MP3 files are recorded to the disc.  
MP3 files do not have the file extension in their file  
names.  
MP3 files are not recorded in a format compliant with Replace the disc. (Record MP3 files using a compliant  
Replace the disc.  
Add correct file extension (.mp3, .Mp3, .mP3 or .MP3)  
A
to their file names. ( pg. 3)  
ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2.  
application.)  
The different types of files are recorded to the disc.  
The disc which contains the different types of files may  
not be played because of its disc characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
Not MP3 files but JPEG The MP3/JPEG setting is set to “JPEG”.  
files are played.  
When both MP3 files and JPEG files are recorded to a  
disc, set “MP3/JPEG” to “MP3” to play MP3 files.  
A
(
pg. 47)  
A
The MP3 control display No MP3 files or JPEG files are recorded to the disc, or Replace the disc. ( pg. 3)  
appears on the TV  
screen, but no operation  
can be performed.  
the disc is an unplayable disc (such as CD-ROM).  
JPEG Playback  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
A disc cannot be played. No JPEG files are recorded to the disc.  
JPEG files do not have the correct file extension in their Add correct file extension (.jpg, .jpeg, .JPG, .JPEG or  
file names. any uppercase and lowercase combination such as  
Replace the disc.  
A
“.Jpg”) to their file names. ( pg. 3)  
JPEG files are not recorded in a format compliant with Replace the disc. (Record JPEG files using a compliant  
ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2.  
application.)  
Not JPEG files but MP3 The MP3/JPEG setting is set to “MP3”.  
files are played.  
When both MP3 files and JPEG files are recorded to a  
disc, set “MP3/JPEG” to “JPEG” to play JPEG files.  
A
(
pg. 47)  
FM/AM  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
Antennas are disconnected.  
SOLUTION  
Hard to listen to  
broadcast because of  
noise.  
Reconnect the antennas correctly and securely.  
The AM loop antenna is too close to the center unit.  
Change the position and direction of the AM loop  
antenna.  
The supplied FM antenna is not properly extended and Extend the FM antenna to the best position.  
positioned.  
A
Beat Cut mode is not set properly while listening to an Try to change the Beat Cut mode. ( pg. 26)  
AM broadcast.  
A
Continuous static during The received signal is too weak.  
FM broadcasts.  
Connect an external FM antenna ( pg. 9), or contact  
your dealer.  
The station is too far away.  
Select another station.  
Others  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
One-touch DVD play  
does not work though  
you have connected AV  
COMPU LINK cord  
correctly.  
The video output jack type to watch the DVD playback Set “M. OUT” properly to watch the DVD playback.  
A
is not set correctly.  
(
pg. 52)  
A
The system suddenly  
turns off by itself.  
The Sleep Timer or Auto Standby function is activated. Turn the functions off. ( pg. 19, 49)  
NOTE  
• Problems may be caused by components connected to the center unit, so also read all manuals for the connected components carefully.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
Multiangle  
By recording multiple scenes progressing at the same time in a  
single title, the user can select view angles. This feature is called  
the multiangle function.  
Glossary  
Aspect ratio  
The ratio of vertical and horizontal sizes of a displayed image. The  
horizontal vs. vertical ratio of conventional TVs is 4:3, and that of  
wide-screens is 16:9.  
Multichannel  
DVD is specified to have each sound track constitute one sound  
field. Multichannel refers to a structure of sound tracks having three  
or more channels.  
Chapter  
Refers to individual chapters included in a title.  
Multilanguage  
When a title is created to cope with multiple languages, it is  
generally called a multilanguage title.  
Composite video signal  
Refers to video signal comprised of three kinds of signals  
combined: an image signal made up of luminance and chrominance  
signals using the frequency multiplication technique; burst signal  
providing the basis for color reproduction; and synchronization  
signal.  
Parental Lock  
A feature of this system to automatically determine whether or not  
to reproduce particular DVD software by comparing its parental  
level (a measure of undesirability of scenes, etc. from educational  
viewpoint) set for the software beforehand with that set on this  
system by the user; if the software’s level is less restrictive than the  
user-set level, it will be reproduced.  
Component video signal  
A video signal system where parts of information necessary for  
reproducing image signal comprised of the three primary colors of  
light are transmitted via separate signal lines. Types of signal, such  
as R/G/B, Y/PB/PR, etc., are available.  
Playback control (PBC)  
Refers to the signal recorded on video CDs or SVCDs for  
controlling reproduction. By using menu screens recorded on a  
Video CD or SVCD that supports PBC, you can enjoy interactive-  
type software as well as software having a search function.  
Disc menu  
A screen display prepared for allowing selection of images, sounds,  
subtitles, multiangles, etc. recorded on a DVD.  
Progressive scan  
Interlaced scan  
Progressive scan displays all the horizontal lines of a picture at one  
time, as a single frame. This system can convert the interlaced  
video from DVD into progressive format for connection to a  
progressive display. It dramatically increases the vertical resolution.  
In the conventional video system, a picture is shown on the display  
monitor in two halves. The Interlaced scan system places lines of  
the second half of the picture in-between lines of the first half of the  
picture.  
Region Code  
JPEG  
A system for allowing discs to be played back only in the regions  
designated beforehand. All the countries in the world are divided  
into six regions, each region being identified by a specified Region  
Code (or region number). If the Region Code given to a disc  
includes a numeral which matches one in the Region Code of a  
player, the player can play back the disc.  
A still-picture data compression system proposed by the Joint  
Photographic Expert Group, which features small decrease in  
image quality in spite of its high compression ratio.  
Letter box  
A method of displaying wide images like movies in the center of a  
4:3 TV screen with no part of the image deleted, by placing black  
bands on the top and bottom of the screen. This name has resulted  
from the screen form looking literally like a letter box.  
Sampling frequency  
Frequency of sampling data when analog data is converted to  
digital data. Sampling frequency numerically represents how many  
times the original analog signal is sampled per second.  
Linear PCM (PCM: Pulse Code Modulation)  
A system for converting analog sound signal to digital signal for  
later processing, with no data compression used in conversion.  
Surround  
A system for creating three-dimensional sound fields full of realism  
by arranging multiple speakers around the listener.  
MP3  
A file format with a sound data compression system. “MP3” is the  
abbreviation of Motion Picture Experts Group 1 (or MPEG-1)  
Audio Layer 3. By using MP3 format, one CD-R or CD-RW can  
contain about 10 times as much data volume as a regular CD can.  
Transfer rate  
The rate of transferring digital data. Usually the measure is in baud  
per second. The DVD system applies a variable transfer rate system  
for high efficiency.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
Menu language (MENU LANGUAGE)........................................46  
4:3 LB......................................................................................47  
4:3 PS ......................................................................................47  
MP3........................................................................................3, 4, 34  
Index  
A
A-B Repeat Playback.................................................................... 43  
Audio CD.................................................................................... 3, 4  
Audio language (AUDIO LANGUAGE) ............................... 37, 46  
Auto standby (AUTO STANDBY) .............................................. 49  
AUTO/PCM.................................................................................. 20  
On-screen guide icons (ON SCREEN GUIDE) ......................22, 49  
On-screen language (ON SCREEN LANGUAGE) ......................46  
B
Playback Control function (PBC)..............................................4, 33  
Program Playback (PROGRAM) ..................................................41  
Progressive mode (PROGRESSIVE) ............................................20  
C
Language menu (LANGUAGE)............................................. 46  
Level menu (LEVEL)............................................................. 48  
Surround mode.......................................................................27 – 30  
S-video.......................................................................................8, 12  
D
Dolby Digital ........................................................................ 27 – 29  
Dolby Pro Logic II................................................................ 27 – 29  
Pro Logic II Music (PL II MUSIC)................................ 27 – 29  
DSP mode ............................................................................. 27 – 30  
DTS Digital Surround........................................................... 27 – 29  
DVD Video (DVD)..................................................................... 3, 4  
Dynamic range compression  
Test tone (TEST TONE)..........................................................30, 48  
Title..................................................................................................4  
Track................................................................................................4  
Tray lock........................................................................................23  
Treble (TREBLE)....................................................................19, 47  
Video CD (VCD).........................................................................3, 4  
Video Fine Processor (VFP)..........................................................40  
Zoom..............................................................................................39  
(D.RANGE COMPRESSION) ............................................... 47, 52  
F
Frame-by-frame playback............................................................. 39  
G
Group .............................................................................................. 4  
I
Interlace mode (INTERLACE)..................................................... 20  
J
JPEG ..................................................................................... 3, 4, 35  
L
Left/Right speaker balance (L/R BALANCE)........................ 47, 52  
Low frequency effect attenuater (LFE ATT.)......................... 47, 52  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
7 Subwoofer (SP-PWM45)  
Amplifier section  
Specifications  
Front/Center/Surround:  
80 W per channel, RMS at 6 C  
(Center/Surround)/80 W per channel,  
RMS at 4 C (Front)  
at 1 kHz, with 10 % total harmonic  
distortion.  
120 W, RMS at 4 C at 100 Hz, with  
10 % total harmonic distortion.  
7 Center unit (XV-THM42)  
Audio section  
Total Harmonic Distortion 0.02 %  
NOTE: This value is measured at System cord CONNECTOR for  
reference.  
Subwoofer:  
Audio input sensitivity/Impedance (at 1 kHz)  
Analog input:  
Speaker section  
Speaker unit:  
16 cm (6-5/16 inches) Bass-reflex,  
Magnetically Shielded  
30 Hz to 200 Hz  
AUDIO IN (VCR):  
Digital input*:  
DIGITAL IN (DBS): –21 dBm to –15 dBm  
(OPTICAL) (660 nm E30 nm)  
290 mV/47 kC  
Frequency Range:  
General  
Power Requirements:  
Power Consumption:  
* Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS Digital  
Surround (with sampling frequency — 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz)  
AC 120 V Ó, 60 Hz  
140 W (at operation)  
0 W (in standby mode)  
Video section  
Color System:  
NTSC  
Dimensions (W M H M D):216 mm M 353 mm M 485 mm  
(8-9/16 inches M 13-15/16 inches M  
19-1/8 inches)  
Horizontal Resolution:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Video output level  
Composite:  
500 lines  
64 dB  
Mass:  
12.0 kg (26.5 lbs)  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 C  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 C  
0.286 V(p-p)/75 C  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 C  
0.7 V(p-p)/75 C  
S-video-Y:  
S-video-C:  
Component-Y:  
Component-PB/PR:  
7 Satellite Speakers  
Front speakers (SP-THM45F)  
Speakers: 8.0 cm (3-3/16 inches)  
Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded  
Power Handling Capacity: 120 W  
Video input sensitivity/Impedance (VCR IN)  
Composite:  
S-video-Y:  
S-video-C:  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 C  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 C  
0.286 V(p-p)/75 C  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
4 C  
90 Hz to 20 kHz  
Dimensions (W M H M D):103 mm M 115 mm M 100 mm  
(4-1/16 inches M 4-9/16 inches M  
3-15/16 inches)  
Tuner section  
Tuning Range  
FM:  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
Mass:  
0.64 kg (1.5 lbs)  
AM:  
Surround speakers (SP-THM45S)  
General  
Speakers: 8.0 cm (3-3/16 inches)  
Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded  
Power Handling Capacity: 80 W  
Power Requirements:  
Power Consumption:  
AC 120 V Ó, 60 Hz  
20 W (at operation)  
1.0 W (in standby mode)  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
6 C  
Dimensions (W M H M D):400 mm M 85 mm M 386 mm  
(15-3/4 inches M 3-3/8 inches M 15-  
1/14 inches)  
90 Hz to 20 kHz  
Dimensions (W M H M D):103 mm M 115 mm M 100 mm  
(4-1/16 inches M 4-9/16 inches M  
3-15/16 inches)  
Mass:  
4.6 kg (10.2 lbs)  
Mass:  
0.52 kg (1.2 lbs)  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
7 Center Speaker (SP-THM45C)  
Speakers:  
8.0 cm (3-3/16 inches)  
Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded  
Power Handling Capacity: 80 W  
Impedance:  
6 C  
Frequency Range:  
90 Hz to 20 kHz  
Dimensions (W M H M D):103 mm M 115 mm M 100 mm  
(4-1/16 inches M 4-9/16 inches M  
3-15/16 inches)  
Mass:  
0.64 kg (1.5 lbs)  
7 Accessories  
• Remote control (1)  
• Batteries (2)  
• FM antenna (1)  
• AM loop antenna (1)  
• Power cord (1)  
• System cord (1)  
• Composite video cord (1)  
• Speaker cords  
5 m (16 ft): For satellite (front left/right) and center speakers (3)  
10 m (32 ft): For satellite speakers (surround left/right) (2)  
(The length of the above speaker cords are approximate.)  
Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Authorized Service Centers  
QUALITY  
SERVICE  
HOW TO LOCATE YOUR JVC SERVICE CENTER  
TOLL FREE: 1 (800) 537-5722  
http://www.jvc.com  
Dear Customer,  
In order to receive the most satisfaction from your purchase, please read the instruction booklet before operating  
the unit. In the event that repairs are necessary, please call 1 (800) 537-5722 for your nearest authorized servicer  
or visit our website at www.JVC.com  
Remember to retain your Bill of Sale for Warranty Service.  
Do not service the television yourself  
Caution  
To prevent electrical shock, do not open the cabinet. There are no user serviceable parts inside. Please  
refer to qualified service personnel for repairs.  
Accessories  
To purchase accessories for your JVC product, please call toll free: 1 (800)882-2345 or on the web at  
www.JVC.com  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EN  
© 2003 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
0503SKMIDEJEM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD DIGITAL THEATER SYSTEM  
SYSTÈME CINÈMA NUMÉRIQUE DVD  
TH-M42  
Consists of XV-THM42, SP-PWM45, SP-THM45C, SP-THM45F and SP-THM45S  
Se compose de XV-THM42, SP-PWM45, SP-THM45C, SP-THM45F et SP-THM45S  
INSTRUCTIONS  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
LVT1024-018A  
[C]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warnings, Cautions and Others  
Mises en garde, précautions et indications diverses  
CAUTION  
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:  
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.  
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.  
ATTENTION  
Afin d’éviter tout risque d’électrocution, d’incendie, etc.:  
1. Ne pas enlever les vis ni les panneaux et ne pas ouvrir le coffret  
de l’appareil.  
For Canada/pour le Canada  
2. Ne pas exposer l’appareil à la pluie ni à l’humidité.  
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH  
WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.  
ATTENTION: POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES,  
INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE  
DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET  
POUSSER JUSQUAU FOND.  
For Canada/pour le Canada  
THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE  
CLASS B LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM  
DIGITAL APPARATUS AS SET OUT IN THE  
INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD  
ENTITLED “DIGITAL APPARATUS,” ICES-003 OF THE  
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS.  
CET APPAREIL NUMERIQUE RESPECTE LES LIMITES  
DE BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES APPLICABLES AUX  
APPAREILS NUMIRIQUES DE CLASSE B PRESCRITES  
DANS LA NORME SUR LE MATERIEL BROUILLEUR:  
APPAREILS NUMERIQUES”, NMB-003 EDICTEE PAR  
LE MINISTRE DES COMMUNICATIONS.  
G-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warnings, Cautions and Others  
Mises en garde, précautions et indications diverses  
Note to CATV system installer:  
CAUTION — F button!  
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s  
attention to Section 820-40 of the NEC which provides  
guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies  
that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding  
system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as  
practical.  
(XV-THM42)  
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely  
(the STANDBY lamp goes off).  
The F button in any position does not disconnect the mains  
line.  
• When the system is on standby, the STANDBY lamp lights  
red.  
• When the system is turned on, the STANDBY lamp goes  
off.  
The power can be remote controlled.  
CAUTION!  
ATTENTION — Touche F  
(XV-THM42)  
Déconnectez la fiche d’alimentation secteur pour couper  
l’alimentation complètement (le témoin STANDBY s’éteint).  
La touche F, dans n’importe quelle position, ne déconnecte  
pas le système du secteur.  
• Quand le système est en attente, le témoin STANDBY est  
allumé en rouge.  
• Quand le système est sous tension, le témoin STANDBY  
s’éteint.  
To avoid personal injury or  
accidentally dropping the unit, have  
two persons unpack, carry, and install  
the unit.  
ATTENTION!  
TH-M42: 25.2 kg  
Pour éviter toute blessure personnelle  
ou toute chute accidentelle de  
l’appareil, celui-ci doit être déballé,  
transporté et installé par deux  
personnes.  
Lalimentation ne peut pas être télécommandée.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
IMPORTANT POUR LES PRODUITS LASER  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. DANGER: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and  
interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.  
3. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user  
serviceable parts inside the Unit; leave all servicing to qualified  
service personnel.  
1. PRODUIT LASER CLASSE 1  
2. DANGER: Radiations laser visibles et invisibles lorsque le  
boîtier de l’appareil est ouvert et que le verrouillage est  
défaillant ou a été annulé.  
3. ATTENTION: Ne pas ouvrir le couvercle du dessus. Il n’y a  
aucune pièce utilisable à l’intérieur. Laisser à un personnel  
qualifié le soin de réparer votre appareil.  
G-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of contents  
Introduction......................................2  
Notes on handling..................................................................2  
Supplied accessories .............................................................2  
Creating realistic sound fields ......27  
Using the surround mode....................................................29  
Adjusting the sound.............................................................30  
About discs ......................................3  
Playable disc types ................................................................3  
Disc structure ........................................................................4  
Playback Control function (PBC) — VCD and SVCD only ......4  
Advanced operations.....................31  
Using the on-screen bar ......................................................31  
Playing from a specified position on a disc..........................32  
Using the MP3 control display.............................................34  
Using the JPEG control display............................................35  
Selecting a view angle of DVD .............................................36  
Selecting the subtitle/audio languages.................................37  
Special picture playback ......................................................39  
Program Playback................................................................41  
Random Playback................................................................42  
Repeat Playback ..................................................................42  
Names of parts and controls ...........5  
Getting started.................................8  
Connections...........................................................................8  
Using the remote control .....................................................14  
Basic operations ............................17  
Turning the system on/off....................................................17  
Selecting the source to play.................................................18  
Adjusting the volume ...........................................................18  
Turning off the sound temporarily .......................................18  
Adjusting the brightness......................................................18  
Using the Sleep Timer..........................................................19  
Adjusting the output level of the subwoofer.........................19  
Adjusting the bass/treble sound...........................................19  
Changing the decode mode .................................................20  
Changing the scan mode .....................................................20  
Setting DVD preferences ...............44  
Using the choice menus ......................................................44  
Menu description.................................................................46  
Parental Lock.......................................................................49  
System setting...............................52  
AV COMPU LINK remote control  
system............................................53  
References .....................................54  
Maintenance ........................................................................54  
Trouble shooting..................................................................54  
Glossary...............................................................................57  
Index....................................................................................58  
Specifications ......................................................................59  
Playback.........................................21  
Basic playback .....................................................................21  
Playback features.................................................................23  
Tuner operations............................25  
Manual tuning......................................................................25  
Preset tuning .......................................................................25  
Selecting the FM reception mode.........................................26  
Reducing the noise of AM broadcast ...................................26  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
7 Safety precautions  
Notes on handling  
7 Important cautions  
Avoid moisture, water and dust  
Do not place the system in moist or dusty places.  
Avoid high temperatures  
Do not expose the system to direct sunlight and do not place it near  
a heating device.  
Installation of the system  
• Select a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor too cold;  
between 5°C and 35°C (41°F and 95°F).  
When you are away  
When away on travel or for other reasons for an extended period of  
time, disconnect the power cord plug from the wall outlet.  
• Leave sufficient distance between the system and the TV.  
• Do not use the system in a place subject to vibration.  
Power cord  
Do not block the vents  
Blocking the vents may damage the system.  
• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands!  
• A small amount of power (1.0 watt) is always consumed while  
the power cord is connected to the wall outlet (center unit only).  
• When unplugging the power cord from the wall outlet, always  
pull on the plug, not the power cord.  
Care of the cabinet  
When cleaning the system, use a soft cloth and follow the relevant  
instructions on the use of chemically-coated cloths. Do not use  
benzene, thinner or other organic solvents including disinfectants.  
These may cause deformation or discoloring.  
To prevent malfunctions of the system  
• There are no user-serviceable parts inside. If anything goes  
wrong, unplug the power cord and consult your dealer.  
• Do not insert any metallic object into the system.  
• Do not use any non-standard shape disc (like a heart, flower or  
credit card, etc.) available on the market, because it may damage  
the system.  
If water gets inside the system  
Turn the system off and disconnect the power cord plug from the  
wall outlet, then call the store where you made your purchase.  
Using the system in this condition may cause fire or electrical  
shock.  
• Do not use a disc with tape, stickers, or paste on it, because it  
may damage the system.  
Label sticker  
Supplied accessories  
Check to be sure you have all of the supplied accessories.  
The number in parentheses is the quantity of the pieces supplied.  
If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately.  
Sticker  
Paste  
• Remote control (1)  
• Batteries (2)  
• FM antenna (1)  
Note about copyright laws  
• AM loop antenna (1)  
• Power cord (1)  
Check the copyright laws in your country before recording from  
DVDs, Super Video CDs (SVCDs), Video CDs (VCDs) and Audio  
CDs. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright  
laws.  
• System cord (1)  
• Composite video cord (1)  
• Speaker cords  
Note about copyguard system  
DVDs are protected by copyguard system. When you connect the  
system to your VCR directly, the copyguard system activates and  
the picture may not be played back correctly.  
5 m: For satellite (front left/right) and center speakers (3)  
10 m: For satellite speakers (surround left/right) (2)  
(Length of speaker cords is approximate.)  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other  
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only  
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About discs  
Especially, the configuration and characteristics of an MP3 disc  
or a JPEG disc are determined by the writing (encoding) software  
and hardware used for recording. Therefore, due to the software  
and hardware used, the following symptoms may occur:  
Playable disc types  
This system has been designed to play back the following discs:  
DVD Video (DVD), Video CD (VCD), Super Video CD (SVCD),  
Audio CD, CD-R and CD-RW.  
• This system can also play back MP3 and JPEG files recorded on  
CD-Rs and CD-RWs. (A pg. 21)  
Some discs may not be played back.  
Some tracks on an MP3 disc may be skipped or may not be  
played back normally.  
Some files on a JPEG disc may be played back distortedly.  
• Before playing back CD-Rs or CD-RWs, read their instructions  
or cautions carefully.  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time. This is caused by  
the fact that the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of  
regular CDs.  
• This system can also play back finalized DVD-Rs recorded in  
DVD VIDEO format. However, some discs may not be played  
back because of their disc characteristics or recording conditions.  
Discs you can play:  
Region  
Disc  
Video  
About MP3 discs  
Mark (Logo)  
Code  
Type  
Format  
MP3 is an abbreviation for Motion Picture Experts Group 1 (or  
MPEG-1) Audio Layer 3. MP3 is simply a compressed data file  
format. By using MP3 format, one CD-R or CD-RW can contain 10  
times as much data as one regular CD.  
Number*  
DVD  
VCD  
NTSC  
NTSC  
1/ALL  
About JPEG discs  
A still-picture data compression system proposed by the Joint  
Photographic Expert Group, which features small decrease in  
image quality in spite of its high compression ratio.  
SVCD  
Audio CD  
CD-R  
NTSC  
Notes on MP3/JPEG discs  
• MP3/JPEG discs (either CD-R or CD-RW) require a longer  
readout time. (It differs due to the complexity of the directory/file  
configuration.)  
• When making an MP3/JPEG disc, select ISO 9660 Level 1 or  
Level 2 for the disc format.  
• This system supports “multi-session” discs (up to 5 sessions).  
• This system cannot play “packet write” discs.  
• The system can only play MP3/JPEG files with the following file  
extensions;  
CD-RW  
MP3: “.MP3”, “.Mp3”, “.mP3” and “.mp3”  
JPEG: “.jpg”, “.jpeg”, “.JPG”, “.JPEG” and any uppercase and  
lowercase combination (such as “.Jpg”)  
* Note on Region Code  
• If both MP3 files and JPEG files are recorded on a disc, set the  
MP3/JPEG setting in the PICTURE menu to the appropriate  
setting for the data to be read (“MP3” or “JPEG”). (A pg. 47)  
• Some MP3/JPEG discs may not be played back because of their  
disc characteristics or recording conditions.  
DVD players and DVDs have their own Region Code numbers. This  
system can only play back DVDs recorded with the color system of  
NTSC whose Region Code number includes “1”.  
Examples:  
Notes on MP3 discs only  
• ID3* tags cannot be shown on the display.  
* An MP3 file can contain file information called an “ID3 Tag”  
where its album name, performer, track title, etc. are recorded.  
There are two versions, ID3v1 (ID3 Tag version 1) and ID3v2  
(ID3 Tag version 2).  
• We recommend to record each piece of material (song) at a  
sample rate of 44.1 kHz and at a data transfer rate of 128 kbps.  
• Some tracks on an MP3 disc may be skipped or may not be  
played back normally.  
If a DVD with an improper Region Code number is loaded,  
“REGION CODE ERROR!” appears on the TV screen and playback  
cannot start.  
• The following discs cannot be played back:  
DVD Audio, DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, CD-ROM,  
CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo CD, etc.  
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the  
speakers.  
• On some DVDs, Video CDs or SVCDs, their actual  
operation may be different from what is explained in this  
manual. This is due to the disc programming and disc  
structure, not a malfunction of this system.  
Notes on JPEG discs only  
• We recommend to record a file at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file  
has been recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480, it will  
take a longer time to be displayed.)  
• This system can only play baseline JPEG files*. Progressive  
JPEG files* or lossless JPEG files* cannot be played.  
* Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras, web, etc.  
Progressive JPEG format:Used for web.  
Notes on CD-R and CD-RW  
• User-edited CD-Rs (Recordable) and CD-RWs (Rewritable) can  
be played back only if they are already “finalized”.  
• This system can play back CD-Rs or CD-RWs recorded on a  
personal computer if they have been recorded in the audio CD  
format.  
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used now.  
• Some files on a JPEG disc may be played back distortedly.  
This system can also play back CD-Rs or CD-RWs if MP3 files  
or JPEG files are recorded on them.  
However, some discs may not be played back because of their  
disc characteristics, recording conditions, or damage or stain on  
them.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
About discs  
IMPORTANT  
Before playing a disc, make sure of the following;  
• Check the connection with the TV.  
• Turn on your TV and select the correct input mode on the TV to view  
the pictures or on-screen information on the TV screen.  
• For DVD playback, you can change the initial setting to your  
preference. (A pg. 44 – 51)  
Playback Control function  
(PBC) — VCD and SVCD  
only  
The Playback Control function allows you to enjoy menu-driven  
operation and high-resolution still images which have a resolution  
four times greater than moving pictures.  
If B appears on the TV screen when pressing a button;  
The disc cannot accept the operation you have tried to do, or the  
information required for that operation is not recorded on the  
disc.  
NOTICE: In some cases, without showing B, operations will  
not be accepted.  
High-resolution still image display  
You can display high-quality images which are four times clearer  
than moving pictures.  
Menu-driven playback  
A selection menu is displayed when you start playing a Video CD  
or SVCD with the Playback Control feature. The selection menu  
shows a list of numbers for selection. Some discs may show  
moving pictures or a divided screen.  
You can interact with the screen using a menu display to select and  
play an entry.  
See example illustration below about basic features of menu-driven  
playback (for details about the operation through the menu, also see  
page 33).  
Disc structure  
DVD  
A DVD consists of “titles” and each title may be divided into  
“chapters”.  
For example, if a DVD contains movies, each movie may have its  
own title number and may be further divided into chapters.  
Menu screen  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Submenu  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 3  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
Press RETURN.  
Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD  
A Video CD, SVCD, Audio CD consists of “tracks”.  
In general, each track has its own track number. (On some discs,  
each track may also be further divided by indexes.)  
Press  
RETURN.  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
MP3 discs  
Press RETURN.  
On an MP3 disc, each song is recorded as a track (file). Tracks are  
usually grouped into a group (folder). Groups can also include  
other groups, creating hierarchical group layers. This system can  
recognize up to 150 tracks per group and up to 99 groups per disc.  
• If there is any type of file other than MP3 files in a group  
(folder), those files are also counted in the total number of 150.  
A: Moving picture  
B: Still picture  
NOTE  
• When operating a Video CD or SVCD using the menu, some  
functions such as Repeat Playback may not work.  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Track 1 Track 2  
Group 3  
Group 4  
Group 5  
JPEG discs  
On a JPEG disc, each still picture is recorded as a file. Files are  
usually grouped into a group (folder). Groups can also include  
other groups, creating hierarchical folder layers. This system can  
recognize up to 150 files per group and up to 99 groups per disc.  
• If there is any type of file other than JPEG files in a group  
(folder), those files are also counted in the total number of 150.  
Group 1  
Group 2  
File 1  
File 2  
Group 3  
Group 4  
Group 5  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Names of parts and controls  
Front panel (center unit)  
A Standby lamp (STANDBY) A pg. 17  
B Standby-on button (F STANDBY/ON) A pg. 17  
C Stop button (7) A pg. 21  
I Volume control (VOLUME) A pg. 18  
J Disc trays A pg. 21  
K Illumination lamp A pg. 18  
L Remote sensor A pg. 14  
D Play button (3) A pg. 21  
E Pause button (8) A pg. 21  
M Display window A pg. 6, 22  
N Open/close buttons (0) A pg. 21  
O Disc buttons (DISC 1-5) A pg. 21  
F Reverse skip button (4) A pg. 24  
G Forward skip button (¢) A pg. 24  
H Source button (SOURCE) A pg. 18  
Rear panel (center unit)  
A System cord connector A pg. 10  
F Video input jacks (VCR IN) A pg. 12  
VIDEO, S-VIDEO  
G Video output jacks (VIDEO OUT) A pg. 8  
COMPONENT (Y, PB, PR)  
H AV COMPU LINK-III jacks A pg. 53  
I Ó AC IN socket A pg. 13  
B Audio input jacks (AUDIO IN (VCR)) A pg. 12  
C Digital input jack (DIGITAL IN) A pg. 12  
D Antenna terminals (ANTENNA) A pg. 9  
E Video output jacks (VIDEO OUT) A pg. 8  
VIDEO, S-VIDEO  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Names of parts and controls  
Display window (center unit)  
A Disc indicators A pg. 23  
B MP3 indicator A pg. 22  
I Dolby Pro Logic II indicator (GPLII) A pg. 27  
Linear PCM indicator (LPCM) A pg. 28  
Digital signal format indicators A pg. 28  
Dolby Digital (GDIGITAL), DTS (C)  
J Surround indicator (SURROUND) A pg. 29  
K DSP indicator A pg. 27 – 29  
L Progressive mode indicator (PROGRESSIVE) A pg. 20  
M Resume indicator (RESUME) A pg. 22  
N Repeat mode indicators A pg. 42  
C Channel indicator (CH) A pg. 26  
D Main display A pg. 22  
E Stereo indicator (ST) A pg. 25  
F Tuning indicator (TUNED) A pg. 25  
G Auto muting indicator (AUTO MUTING) A pg. 26  
H Source signal indicators (abcdghi)  
A pg. 28  
Subwoofer indicator (  
) A pg. 28  
Sound reproducing speaker indicator ( ) A pg. 28  
Powered subwoofer  
Rear  
Front  
A System cord connector A pg. 10  
B Front speaker terminals (FRONT SPEAKERS) A pg. 11  
C Center speaker terminals (CENTER SPEAKER) A pg. 11  
D Surround speaker terminals (SURROUND SPEAKERS) A pg. 11  
E Power cord A pg. 13  
F Power lamp (POWER ON) A pg. 17  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Names of parts and controls  
A Remote control mode selector A pg. 15 – 52  
AUDIO, TV, VCR/DBS  
Remote control  
B Muting button (MUTING) A pg. 18  
C Disc buttons (DISC 1-5) A pg. 21  
D TV volume buttons (TV VOL +/–) A pg. 15  
E Operating buttons  
Play button (3) A pg. 22  
Forward/reverse skip buttons (¢/4) A pg. 24  
Fast-forward/reverse playback buttons (¡/1) A pg. 24  
Stop button (7) A pg. 21  
Pause button (8) A pg. 21  
Tuning buttons (TUNING ª, TUNING ·) A pg. 25  
Memory button (MEMORY) A pg. 26  
FM reception/Beat Cut mode button (FM MODE) A pg. 26  
F Top menu button (TOP MENU) A pg. 32  
G Cursor buttons (3/2///5) A pg. 32  
Enter button (ENTER) A pg. 15  
H One Touch Replay button ( ) A pg. 23  
Record button (REC) A pg. 16  
I Audio button (AUDIO) A pg. 37, 38  
J Subtitle button (SUBTITLE) A pg. 37  
K VFP setting button A pg. 40  
Progressive mode button (PROGRESSIVE) A pg. 20  
L Choice menu button (CHOICE) A pg. 44  
M Setting button (SETTING) A pg. 52  
N Title/group button (TITLE/GROUP) A pg. 33  
O Repeat button (REPEAT) A pg. 42  
P A-B repeat button (A-B REPEAT) A pg. 43  
Q Sleep button (SLEEP) A pg. 19  
R Dimmer button (DIMMER) A pg. 18  
S Surround buttons (SURROUND)  
Mode (MODE), On/Off (ON/OFF) A pg. 29  
T Effect button (EFFECT) A pg. 30  
U Test tone button (TEST) A pg. 30  
V Subwoofer adjustment buttons (S.WFR +/–) A pg. 19  
W Center speaker adjustment buttons (CENTER +/–) A pg. 30  
X Standby-on button (F AUDIO) A pg. 17  
Y Standby-on button (F VCR/DBS) A pg. 15  
Z Standby-on button (F TV) A pg. 15  
a Source selecting buttons A pg. 18  
DVD, FM/AM, DBS, VCR  
b TV/Video mode button (TV/VIDEO) A pg. 15  
c Channel buttons (CHANNEL +/–) A pg. 15  
d Volume buttons (AUDIO VOL +/–) A pg. 18  
e Menu button (MENU) A pg. 32  
f On-screen button (ON SCREEN) A pg. 31  
g Number buttons A pg. 15, 24, 33  
TV returning button (TV RETURN) A pg. 15  
h Return button (RETURN) A pg. 4, 33  
i Angle button (ANGLE) A pg. 36  
j Decode mode button (DECODE) A pg. 20  
k Zoom button (ZOOM) A pg. 39  
l Cancel button (CANCEL) A pg. 41  
m Display window button (FL DISPLAY) A pg. 22  
n Treble adjustment buttons (TREBLE +/–) A pg. 19  
o Bass adjustment buttons (BASS +/–) A pg. 19  
p Surround speaker adjustment buttons (SURR) A pg. 30  
Left (L +/–), Right (R +/–)  
NOTE  
• To use buttons I –  
W and g p, slide  
down the remote  
control cover.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Connections  
Do not connect the AC power cord until all other connections have been made.  
• Since different components often have different terminal names, carefully read the instructions supplied with the components you are going  
to connect.  
Connecting a TV  
To view pictures and on-screen displays, connect the TV to the center unit.  
You can get better picture quality in the order — Component video > S-video > Composite video.  
• Distortion of picture may occur when connecting to the TV via a VCR, or to a TV with a built-in VCR.  
You need to set “MONITOR TYPE” in the PICTURE menu correctly according to the aspect ratio of your TV. (A pg. 47)  
7 To connect a TV through the component video input jacks  
If your TV has component video input jacks, connect them using a component video cord (not supplied) to view a high quality picture.  
• Connect “Y” to “Y”, “PB” to “PB”, “PR” to “PR” correctly.  
• If your TV supports progressive video input, you can enjoy a high quality picture by setting the progressive scan mode to active. (A pg. 20)  
Center unit  
Green  
Red  
To component video input  
TV  
Blue  
Component video cord  
(not supplied)  
NOTE  
• If the component video input jacks of your TV are of the BNC type, use a plug adapter (not supplied) to convert the pin plugs to BNC plugs.  
• The component video signals can be output only when you select “DVD” as the source to play. (A pg. 18)  
7 To connect a TV through the composite or S-video jacks  
Connect the TV using the composite video cord (supplied) or an S-video cord (not supplied).  
If your TV has an S-video (Y/C-separation) jack, you can get better picture quality than by using composite video connection.  
• Connect the S-video cord by matching the / mark on the plug to the one on the rear of the center unit.  
Center unit  
To composite  
video input  
Composite video cord  
(supplied)  
TV  
or  
To S-video input  
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Getting started  
If reception is poor  
Connecting the FM and AM antennas  
Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals,  
connecting cords and power cords. This could cause poor reception.  
Connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered wire antenna (not  
supplied) to the AM EXT terminal. (Keep the AM loop antenna  
connected.)  
• Twist together both wires.  
7 AM loop antenna  
Setting up supplied AM loop antenna  
Attach the AM loop to its base by snapping the tabs on the loop into  
the slot on the base.  
AM loop antenna  
Outdoor single vinyl-covered wire antenna  
(not supplied)  
7 FM antenna  
Connecting supplied FM antenna  
Center unit  
If the antenna cord is covered with the insulation  
coat, twist and pull the insulation coat off and  
remove.  
Connecting AM loop antenna  
Center unit  
Extend the supplied FM  
antenna horizontally.  
If reception is poor  
Connect an outdoor FM antenna with standard type (75 C coaxial)  
Press and hold down the terminal  
clamp.  
connector.  
Outdoor FM antenna  
(not supplied)  
Insert the antenna cord.  
Outdoor FM antenna cord  
(not supplied)  
Release finger from the clamp.  
NOTE  
• Disconnect the supplied FM antenna before attaching a 75 C coaxial  
connector (the kind with a round wire going to an outdoor antenna).  
• We recommend that you use coaxial cable for the FM antenna as it is  
well-shielded against interference.  
• Turn the loop antenna until you have the best reception.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting started  
Connecting the powered subwoofer  
Connect the supplied powered subwoofer (SP-PWM45) using the system cord (supplied).  
• Connect the system cord by matching the 5 marks on the plugs to the ones on the center unit and powered subwoofer.  
System cord  
(supplied)  
Ensure that the  
mark on  
5
the plug faces down.  
Center unit  
Powered  
subwoofer  
Connecting the satellite speakers  
7 Speaker layout  
When positioning the speakers, to obtain the best possible sound  
from this system you need to place all satellite speakers at the same  
distance from the listening position with the front of each speaker  
facing toward the listener.  
Front left  
Front right  
When you cannot place them at the same distance from the  
listening position, you can make adjustment so that  
speakers operate as if they are placed at the best position.  
(A pg. 48)  
• Normally place the powered subwoofer in front of you. (Since  
bass sound is non-directional, you do not need to place it at the  
same distance as the other speakers.)  
Center  
speaker  
Powered  
subwoofer  
NOTE  
• Although the satellite speakers and the powered subwoofer are  
magnetically shielded, the TV screen may appear mottled. In this  
case, keep the distance between them to the TV to over 10 cm.  
• For safety reasons, always ensure that there is sufficient space behind  
the powered subwoofer.  
• When you position the satellite speakers in a relatively high place,  
such as the top of your bookshelf, place them on a flat and level  
surface.  
Surround left  
Surround right  
• Speaker grilles are not removable. Trying to remove them by force  
may damage them.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Getting started  
7 Connecting the satellite (front, center, surround) speakers  
Be sure to identify each speaker (SP-THM45C/SP-THM45F/SP-THM45S) and connect them to the corresponding terminals of the  
powered subwoofer.  
CAUTION  
• When you connect (larger) speakers other than the supplied ones, only use speakers with the same speaker impedance (SPEAKER IMPEDANCE)  
as indicated by the speaker terminals on the rear of the powered subwoofer.  
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to one speaker terminal.  
Front speakers (SP-THM45F)  
Before connecting the  
speaker cords;  
Twist and pull the  
insulation coat off and  
remove.  
Press and hold  
the clamp.  
Insert the bare end of the  
speaker cord into the  
terminal.  
Release the  
clamp.  
• Connect the white cords to the red (ª) terminals and black cords  
to the black (·) terminals.  
Center speaker  
(SP-THM45C)  
Powered  
subwoofer  
White  
Black  
Red  
Surround speakers  
(SP-THM45S)  
Black  
CAUTION  
When installing the satellite speakers on the wall;  
• Be sure to have them installed on the wall by a qualified personnel.  
DO NOT install the satellite speakers on the wall by yourself to avoid unexpected damage from their falling off the wall due to incorrect installation  
or weakness in wall structure.  
• Care must be taken in selecting a location for speaker installation on a wall. Injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result if the speakers  
installed interfere with daily activities.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting started  
Connecting to an analog component  
You can enjoy the sound of an analog component such as a VCR, TV, or Cassette recorder with this system. Use RCA pin plug cords (not  
supplied) for connection.  
Center unit  
A To composite video output  
B To S-video output  
C To audio output  
Red  
White  
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
RCA pin plug cord  
(not supplied)  
or  
Composite video cord  
(not supplied)  
C
A
B
C
C
VCR  
TV  
Cassette recorder  
NOTE  
• The signals input to the VIDEO jack of the VCR IN jacks will be output only from the VIDEO jack of the VIDEO OUT jacks, not from the S-VIDEO  
jack of the VIDEO OUT jacks.  
Connecting to a digital component  
You can enjoy the sound of a digital component such as a DBS (Direct Broadcast Satellite) tuner or MD recorder with this system. Use digital  
optical cord (not supplied) for connection.  
Before connecting a digital  
optical cord, unplug the  
protective plug.  
Center unit  
Digital optical cord  
(not supplied)  
To digital optical output  
DBS tuner  
MD recorder  
NOTE  
• Only digital audio signals can be input when selecting “DBS” as the source to play. (A pg. 18) When connecting a video component such as a DBS  
tuner, operate this system to listen to the sound.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Getting started  
Connecting the power cord  
Make sure that all connections have been completed, before plugging in the power cords of the center unit and powered subwoofer.  
1
Firmly insert the supplied power cord into the Ó AC IN socket on the rear of the center  
2 unit.  
Plug both power cords into AC outlets.  
Powered subwoofer  
Center unit  
Plug into AC outlets.  
Power cord  
(supplied)  
Power cord  
CAUTION  
• Disconnect the power cord before cleaning or moving the system.  
• Do not touch the power cord with wet hands.  
• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When unplugging the cord, always grasp and pull the plug so as not to damage the cord.  
NOTE  
• Keep power cords away from other connected cords. The power cords may cause noise or screen interference.  
• Preset settings, such as preset stations and surround mode adjustment, may be erased in a few days in the following cases;  
If you unplug the power cord of the center unit.  
If a power failure occurs.  
• The speakers will not produce any sound if the power cord of the powered subwoofer is removed from the AC outlet while the center unit is turned on.  
In this case, press  
AUDIO on the remote control or STANDBY/ON on the center unit to turn the power off, plug in the powered subwoofer,  
F
F
then press  
AUDIO or  
STANDBY/ON again.  
F
F
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting started  
Operating the system from the remote  
control  
Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the center  
unit.  
Using the remote control  
The remote control makes it easy to use many of the system  
functions from a distance of up to 7 m away.  
You can also use the remote control supplied for this system to  
operate other manufacturers’ TVs (A pg. 15), VCRs (A pg. 16)  
and DBS tuners/CATV converters (A pg. 15).  
To control other components, aim the remote control directly at  
the remote sensor on each component. Refer also to their  
instruction manuals.  
To operate the remote control properly, do not hide the remote  
sensor by placing any obstructions in front of it.  
Putting batteries in the remote control  
Before using the remote control, first put in the 2 supplied batteries.  
1 Remove the battery  
cover on the back of  
the remote control.  
Remote sensor  
2 Insert the batteries.  
• Make sure to match polarity: (+) to  
(+) and (–) to (–).  
3 Replace the cover.  
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases,  
replace the batteries. Use two R6P (SUM-3)/AA (15F) type dry-  
cell batteries.  
CAUTION  
• Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking batteries;  
Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may  
differ in voltage.  
Always replace both batteries at the same time.  
Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting started  
4 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
the manufacturer’s code (2 digits).  
Examples:  
For a Hitachi TV: Press 1, then 0.  
For a Toshiba TV:Press 0, then 8.  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Code Manufacturer  
Code  
12  
01  
10  
02  
03  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Sharp  
Hitachi  
13  
Magnavox  
Mitsubishi  
Panasonic  
RCA  
06  
Sony  
07  
(play button)  
04, 11 Toshiba  
05 Zenith  
08  
09  
5 Release F TV.  
6 Try operating your TV by pressing  
F TV.  
When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct  
code.  
If there is more than one code listed for corresponding brand,  
try each one until you enter the correct one.  
Number  
buttons  
NOTE  
• Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are  
changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.  
• Set the codes again after replacing the batteries of the remote control.  
7 Operation  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control to operate a  
TV;  
• Set the remote control mode selector to TV.  
The following buttons are available:  
F TV:  
Turns TV on and off.  
Adjusts the volume.  
Selects the input mode (either TV or  
VIDEO).  
TV VOL +/–:  
TV/VIDEO:  
CHANNEL +/–:  
Changes the channels.  
1-10, 0, +10 (100+): Selects the channel.  
TV RETURN: Alternates between the previously selected  
channel and the current channel.  
For TV operations  
You can operate your TV using the remote control supplied with  
this system.  
• Refer also to the instruction manuals supplied with your TV.  
For DBS tuner or CATV converter  
operations  
You can operate your DBS tuner or CATV converter using the  
remote control supplied with this system.  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
You can operate a JVC TV without setting the remote control  
signal.  
• Refer also to the instruction manuals supplied with your DBS  
tuner or CATV converter.  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
to TV.  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
2 Press and hold F TV.  
3 PKereepsthse bEutNtonTpEreRss.ed until step 4 is finished.  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
to VCR/DBS.  
2 Press and hold DBS.  
3 PKereepsthse bEutNtonTpEreRss.ed until step 4 is finished.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Getting started  
4 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
4 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
the manufacturer’s code (2 digits).  
the manufacturer’s code (2 digits).  
Examples:  
For a GI Jerrold product:Press 0, then 1.  
Examples:  
For a Philips VCR: Press 0, then 9.  
For a Sony product:  
Press 2, then 0.  
For an NEC VCR: Press 2, then 5.  
Manufacturer  
Echostar  
Code  
Manufacturer Code  
Manufacturer Code  
21  
JVC  
01, 02, 03  
Philips  
RCA  
09  
GI Jerrold  
Hamin/Regal  
Pioneer  
01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08  
Emerson  
Fisher  
11, 26  
29  
05, 06  
24  
15, 16, 17, 18  
13, 14  
19  
Samsung  
Funai  
10, 14, 15, 16 Sanyo  
21, 22, 23  
27, 28  
30  
RCA  
Gold Star  
Hitachi  
Mitsubishi  
NEC  
12  
Sharp  
Scientific Atlanta  
Sony  
09, 10  
20  
04  
Shintom  
Sony  
13  
18, 19, 20  
08  
Zenith  
11, 12  
25  
Zenith  
Panasonic  
07, 17  
5 Release DBS.  
5 Release VCR.  
6 Try operating your DBS tuner or CATV  
converter by pressing F VCR/DBS.  
6 Try operating your VCR by pressing  
When your DBS tuner or CATV converter turns on or off, you  
have entered the correct code.  
F VCR/DBS.  
When your VCR turns on or off, you have entered the correct  
code.  
If there is more than one code listed for your brand, try each  
one until you enter the correct one.  
If there is more than one cord listed for your brand, try each  
one until you enter the correct one.  
NOTE  
• Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are  
changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.  
• Set the codes again after replacing the batteries of the remote control.  
NOTE  
• Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are  
changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.  
• Set the codes again after replacing the batteries of the remote control.  
7 Operation  
IMPORTANT  
7 Operation  
Before using the remote control to operate a  
DBS tuner or CATV converter;  
1 Set the remote control mode selector to  
VCR/DBS.  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control to operate a  
VCR;  
1 Set the remote control mode selector to  
2 Press DBS.  
VCR/DBS.  
2 Press VCR.  
The following buttons are available:  
F VCR/DBS:  
Turns DBS tuner or CATV converter on and  
off.  
Changes the channels.  
The following buttons are available:  
F VCR/DBS: Turns VCR on and off.  
3 (play button): Starts playback.  
CHANNEL +/–:  
1-10, 0, +10 (100+): Selects the channel.  
7 :  
Stops operation.  
8 :  
Pauses playback.  
Fast forwards video tape.  
Rewinds video tape.  
Press this button together with 3 (play button) to  
start recording or together with 8 to pause  
recording.  
¢:  
4:  
REC:  
For VCR operations  
You can operate your VCR using the remote control supplied with  
this system.  
• Refer also to the instruction manuals supplied with your VCR.  
CHANNEL +/–: Changes the TV channels on the VCR.  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
NOTE  
When operating a VCR or DBS tuner/CATV converter;  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
• The source setting of VCR or DBS remains after you have changed  
the remote control mode selector to AUDIO or TV. When operating  
VCR or DBS tuner/CATV converter again, it is not necessary to press  
VCR or DBS after setting the remote control mode selector.  
to VCR/DBS.  
2 Press and hold VCR.  
3 PKereepsthse bEutNtonTpEreRss.ed until step 4 is finished.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic operations  
This section mainly explains operations commonly used when you  
enjoy this system.  
• Turn on your TV and select the correct input mode on the TV.  
Turning the system on/off  
7 To turn the power on  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation,  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO.  
On the remote control:  
Press F AUDIO.  
On the center unit:  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Press F STANDBY/ON.  
The STANDBY lamp goes off.  
When DVD is selected as the source (A pg. 18), the opening  
screen* appears on the TV screen.  
* Opening screen  
The following messages may  
appear in the message area  
depending on the status of this  
system.  
Source  
selecting  
buttons  
• “OPEN”/“CLOSE”:  
Appears when opening or  
closing the selected disc tray.  
Message area  
• “NOW READING”:  
Appears when the system is  
reading the disc information.  
• “REGION CODE ERROR!”:  
Appears when the Region Code of the DVD does not match the  
code the center unit supports. The DVD cannot be played back.  
• “NO DISC”:  
Appears when no disc is loaded to the selected disc tray.  
7 To turn the power off  
On the remote control:  
Press F AUDIO again.  
On the center unit:  
Press F STANDBY/ON again.  
The STANDBY lamp lights.  
NOTE  
• The power supply to the subwoofer is linked to the center unit. The  
POWER ON lamp on the subwoofer lights green when the power is  
turned on.  
• A small amount of the power is consumed even when the power is  
turned off (center unit only). This is called standby mode and the  
STANDBY lamp lights in this mode. Unplug the power cord from the  
AC outlet to turn the power off completely.  
• You can also turn on the system by pressing the following buttons;  
One of 0 buttons on the center unit  
One of the source selecting buttons on the remote control  
One of the DISC (1-5) buttons or 3 on the center unit.  
You can use the same buttons on the remote control except after  
pressing FM/AM.  
Illumination lamp  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic operations  
Selecting the source to  
play  
Turning off the sound  
temporarily  
On the remote control:  
On the remote control:  
(DVD, FM/AM, VCR or DBS).  
Press MUTING.  
“MUTING” appears on the display window and the sound turns off.  
DVD: To play back a disc (DVD, Video CD etc.). (A pg. 21, 23)  
FM/AM: To tune in an FM or AM station. (A pg. 25)  
Each time you press the button, the band alternates  
between FM and AM.  
To restore the sound  
Press MUTING again.  
• Pressing AUDIO VOL +/– (or turning VOLUME on the center  
unit) also restores the sound.  
VCR: To select the source from a component connected to the  
VCR IN jacks and AUDIO IN (VCR) jacks. (A pg. 12)  
DBS: To select the source from a component connected to the  
DIGITAL IN (DBS) jack. (A pg. 12)  
On the center unit:  
Adjusting the brightness  
You can dim the indications on the display window, the  
illumination lamp level on the center unit.  
Press SOURCE repeatedly until the source  
name you want appears on the display  
window.  
Each time you press the button, the source changes as follows;  
On the remote control:  
] DVD ] AM ] FM ] VCR ] DBS ] (back to the  
beginning)  
Press DIMMER.  
Each time you press the button, the brightness level changes as  
follows;  
The selected source name appears on the display window.  
Example:When “VCR” is selected.  
] OFF ] DIMMER1 ] DIMMER2 ] (back to the  
beginning)  
• OFF:  
Returns to the normal level.  
• DIMMER1:Dims the display window, the illumination lamp.  
• DIMMER2:Dims the display window more than DIMMER1 and  
turns off the illumination lamp.  
NOTE  
• When a source except DVD is selected, this system does not output  
video signals.  
Adjusting the volume  
CAUTION  
• Always set the volume to minimum level before starting any source.  
If the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound could  
permanently damage your hearing and/or blow out the speakers.  
You can adjust the volume level within the range from “0”  
(minimum) to “70” (maximum).  
On the remote control:  
Press AUDIO VOL + or –.  
• Press + to increase volume.  
• Press to decrease volume.  
On the center unit:  
Turn VOLUME.  
• Turn VOLUME clockwise to increase volume.  
• Turn VOLUME counterclockwise to decrease volume.  
The volume level appears on the display window.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic operations  
To change the remaining time until the shut-off time  
Press SLEEP repeatedly.  
• Each time you press the button, the shut-off time changes.  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation,  
• Set the remote control mode selector to AUDIO.  
To cancel the Sleep Timer  
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “0min” appears on the display  
window.  
• Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer.  
Remote control  
mode selector  
NOTE  
• When DVD is selected as the source to play, the system can also turn  
off automatically if playback is not restarted within the length of time  
you have specified (Auto Standby function). (A pg. 49)  
• When both the Sleep Timer and Auto Standby function are activated,  
if the shut-off time set by the Auto Standby function comes earlier  
than the one set by the Sleep Timer, the Auto Standby function  
controls shut-off time.  
Adjusting the output level  
of the subwoofer  
You can adjust the output level within the range from –10 to 10.  
On the remote control:  
Press S.WFR +/–.  
NOTE  
• You can also make adjustments using the choice menu shown on the  
TV screen. (A pg. 48)  
• The adjustments on a source take effect for the other sources.  
Adjusting the bass/treble  
sound  
You can adjust each enhancement level from the front speakers  
within the range from –10 to 10.  
On the remote control:  
Press BASS +/– for bass sound.  
NOTE  
• You can also make adjustments using the choice menu shown on the  
TV screen. (A pg. 47)  
• The adjustments on a source take effect for the other sources.  
• You can adjust bass/treble enhancement level only for front left/right  
channel. However, the supplied speakers cannot add the effective  
change to the bass sound because of their cutoff frequency even if the  
bass sound adjustment is made. (A pg. 48)  
Using the Sleep Timer  
Using the Sleep Timer, you can fall asleep while listening to music  
and know the system will turn off by itself rather than play all night.  
To change the bass enhancement level more efficiently, adjust the  
output level of the subwoofer. (A “Adjusting the output level of the  
subwoofer”)  
(When you change the front speakers to the larger ones and select  
“LARGE” for the front speakers in the SIZE sub-menu (A pg. 48),  
the effective adjustment of bass sound is also possible by pressing  
BASS +/.)  
On the remote control:  
Press SLEEP.  
Each time you press the button, the shut-off time changes as  
follows;  
] 0min (cancelled) ] 10min (minutes) ] 20min ] 30min  
] 60min ] 90min ] 120min ] 150min ] (back to the  
beginning)  
To check the remaining time until the shut-off time  
Press SLEEP once.  
• The remaining time until the shut-off time appears on the display  
window for a while.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic operations  
Changing the decode  
mode  
When you play a disc (or software) encoded with Dolby Digital or  
DTS Digital Surround, the following symptoms may occur;  
• Sound does not come out at the beginning of playback.  
• Noise comes out while searching for or skipping chapters or  
tracks.  
Changing the scan mode  
This system supports the progressive scan system (480p*) as well  
as the conventional interlaced scan system (480i*).  
If your TV equipped with component jacks supports the  
progressive video input, you can enjoy a high quality picture by  
setting the progressive scan mode to active.  
• Refer also to the instruction manuals supplied with your TV.  
• If your TV equipped with component jacks does not support the  
progressive video input, do not change the scan mode to the  
progressive scan mode.  
In these cases, change the decode mode to “DOLBY D” (for Dolby  
Digital) or “DTS” (for DTS Digital Surround).  
7 When DVD or DBS is selected as the source  
* 480p and 480i indicate the number of scanning lines and  
scanning format of an image signal.  
On the remote control:  
480p indicates 480 scanning lines with progressive format.  
Press DECODE to select the decode mode.  
The current decode mode appears on the display window.  
Example:When “AUTO/PCM” is selected.  
480i indicates 480 scanning lines with interlaced format.  
7 When DVD is selected as the source  
On the remote control:  
1 Press DVD.  
Each time you press the button, the decode mode changes as  
follows;  
2 Press and hold PROGRESSIVE for  
3 seconds.  
Each time you perform this operation, the scan mode changes  
as follows;  
] AUTO/PCM ] DOLBY D ] DTS ] (back to the  
beginning)  
• AUTO/PCM: Normally select this. The system automatically  
detects the incoming signals.  
INTERLACE O PROGRESSIVE  
• INTERLACE: Select this if your TV equipped with  
component jacks supports the interlaced  
video input only.  
• DOLBY D: Select this if the symptoms above occur when  
playing a disc (or software) encoded with Dolby  
Digital.  
• PROGRESSIVE:Select this if your TV equipped with  
component jacks supports the progressive  
video input.  
• DTS:  
Select this if the symptoms above occur when  
playing a disc (or software) encoded with DTS  
Digital Surround.  
When “PROGRESSIVE” is selected, the PROGRESSIVE  
indicator lights.  
NOTE  
• When “DOLBY D” or “DTS” is selected, if a signal encoded with  
another digital format comes in, you cannot listen to the sound. (The  
NOTE  
DIGITAL or  
indicator flashes.)  
G
C
• There are some progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs that are not  
fully compatible with this system, resulting in an unnatural picture  
when playing back a DVD in the progressive scan mode. In such a  
case, change the scan mode to “INTERLACE”.  
• Changing the source returns the decode mode to “AUTO/PCM”  
automatically.  
To check the compatibility of your TV, contact your local JVC  
customer service center.  
• All JVC progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs are fully  
compatible with this system.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback  
This section explains basic operations of DVD player.  
For more details about DVD player operations, see pages 31 to 43.  
Basic playback  
shows the types of discs the operation is  
available for.  
7 To load a disc  
Up to 5 discs can be  
loaded.  
• Turn on your TV and select the correct input mode on the TV.  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
1 Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO.  
2 Press DVD.  
1 Press 0 for a desired disc tray on the  
2 PThleascysetema tdurinssconoannd tthheedisdcitsracy ctormaeys .out.  
center unit to open the disc tray.  
With the label side up  
Remote control  
mode selector  
When placing an 8 cm disc  
(play button)  
7 To start playback  
3 Press the selected DISC (1-5) button.  
The system starts playback after closing the disc tray.  
You can use the same buttons on the center unit for operations  
unless otherwise noted.  
When loading an MP3 disc  
The MP3 control display (A pg. 34) appears on the TV screen and  
playback starts from the first track in the first group after pressing  
the DISC button in step 3. When all tracks in a group have been  
played, the system starts playback of tracks in the next group.  
When loading a JPEG disc  
The slide-show* playback starts from the first file in the first group  
after pressing the DISC button in step 3. When stopping playback  
of a JPEG disc, the JPEG control display (A pg. 35) appears on the  
TV screen.  
* Slide-show  
Each file (still picture) is shown on the TV screen for about 3  
seconds, then changed to the next file one after another  
automatically. When all files in a group have been played, the  
system starts playback of files in the next group.  
7 To pause playback  
Press 8.  
To return to normal playback, press 3 (play button).  
7 To stop playback  
Press 7.  
To change the playback disc while playing back the  
another disc  
Press the desired DISC (1-5) button.  
• If no disc is set in the specified tray, the system starts playback of  
the disc in the next tray automatically.  
To remove a disc  
Press 0 for a desired disc tray on the center unit.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Playback  
7 Playback information on the display window  
NOTE  
• You can also start playback by pressing (play button) or DVD.  
DVD  
3
• Regardless of the operation for starting playback, the system plays  
back all available discs sequentially until you stop playback.  
However, the system stops playback after playback of the disc in the  
fifth tray.  
Example:When a DVD encoded with Dolby Digital 5.1ch is played  
Elapsed playing time  
(hour:minute:second)  
Disc indicators  
Chapter number  
• When Video CDs/SVCDs with PBC function (A pg. 4) or DVD that  
automatically go to the menu screen and wait for the next instruction,  
the system does not move to the next disc. In such a case, select the  
item to be played back from the menu. (A pg. 33)  
• You can check playback information on the display window and the  
TV screen. (A pg. 31)  
Signal and speaker indicators  
Surround mode and digital signal format  
• Some tracks on an MP3 disc may be skipped or may not be played  
back normally.  
Each time FL DISPLAY is pressed, the indications  
alternate between those shown above and below.  
• When you play back a JPEG disc, press buttons after the whole  
picture appears on the TV screen. The system cannot accept  
operations even though you press buttons while showing a picture.  
• Some files on a JPEG disc may be played back distortedly.  
• If a black screen continuously appears in the slide-show playback, the  
file currently being played may be a non-baseline JPEG file. In this  
case, select a playable file (a baseline JPEG file). For example, press  
Title number  
Chapter number  
or MENU to open the JPEG control display, etc. Note that it may  
7
take a long time to select another file.  
Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD  
Example:When a Video CD is played back  
7 Resume Playback (DVD/Video CD/SVCD only)  
When Resume Playback is set to “ON” (A pg. 49) and you stop  
playback by the following operations, the position where playback  
has been stopped is stored. (The RESUME indicator lights.)  
• Turning off the power (A pg. 17)  
Signal and speaker  
indicators  
Disc indicators  
Track number  
• Pressing 7  
• Changing the source (A pg. 18)  
Elapsed playing time (minute:second)  
To start playback from the stored position  
(The RESUME indicator goes off.)  
• Press the selected DISC button or 3 (play button) on the remote  
control or the center unit.  
NOTE  
• When a Video CD or SVCD with PBC function is played, the elapsed  
playing time does not appear, but “PBC” appears.  
• Select DVD as the source again if you changed the source.  
MP3 disc  
Disc indicators  
Track number  
Signal and speaker  
indicators  
To clear the stored position  
Press 7 again or open the disc tray with the playback disc.  
• When the stored position has been cleared, playback starts from  
the beginning of the disc.  
7 To prevent screen burn-out with the screen saver  
A TV screen may burn out if a static picture is displayed for a long  
time. To prevent this, the system automatically dims the screen if a  
static picture is displayed for over 5 minutes (the screen saver  
function).  
MP3 indicator  
Elapsed playing time (minute:second)  
(during playback only)  
Each time FL DISPLAY is pressed, the indications  
alternate between those shown above and below.  
• Pressing any button will cancel the screen saver function.  
• If you do not want to use the screen saver function, see page 47.  
Group number  
Track number  
7 On-screen guide icons  
During DVD playback, the following guide icons may appear for a  
while on the TV screen;  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-  
subtitle languages.  
JPEG disc  
Disc indicators  
File number  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-audio  
languages.  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-angle  
views.  
Group number  
(Play),  
(Pause),  
/
(Fast forward/  
fast-reverse),  
/
(Slow-motion forward/  
reverse): appears when you perform each operation.  
• If B” appears on the TV screen when pressing a button, the disc  
cannot accept an operation you have tried to do or information  
required for that operation is not recorded to the disc.  
NOTE  
• In some cases, without showing “ ”, operations will not be accepted.  
B
• If you do not want the on-screen guide icons to appear, see page 49.  
Continued on next page  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Playback  
NOTE  
Playback features  
• You can change the time information mode. (A pg. 32)  
• You can also check the playback information on the TV screen.  
(A pg. 31)  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
1 Set the remote control mode selector to  
7 Disc information on the display window  
The disc indicators on the display window show the current status  
of the corresponding disc tray.  
AUDIO.  
2 Press DVD.  
Example:When the discs are loaded to disc trays 1, 2 and 5, and the  
disc in the disc tray 5 is selected.  
Currently loaded disc numbers  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Currently selected disc  
number (  
appears beside  
the disc number)  
NOTE  
When loading a disc;  
• Only after a DISC button is pressed the system starts reading the  
information of the disc on the specified tray. After that, the disc  
indicators show the current disc status correctly.  
(play button)  
7 Tray lock  
You can lock trays and prohibit the unwanted disc ejection by  
children.  
On the center unit ONLY:  
While the system is turned off  
Press and hold 7, then press 0 for DISC 1.  
Number  
buttons  
• The system turns on and “LOCKED” appears on the display  
window.  
• If you try to eject discs, “LOCKED” appears and indicates that  
trays are locked.  
To unlock trays  
When the system is turned off, press and hold 7, then press 0 for  
DISC 1.  
• The system turns on and “UNLOCKED” appears on the display  
window.  
One Touch Replay  
You can move back the playback position by 10 seconds  
from the current position.  
7 During playback  
On the remote control:  
Press  
.
NOTE  
• This function works between chapters in the same title.  
• This function may not work for some DVDs.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playback  
Fast-forward/fast-reverse search  
Locating a desired selection using number  
buttons  
You can search for a particular point  
while playing a disc.  
You can locate the  
desired title, chapter,  
track or file by  
7 During playback  
On the remote control:  
Press ¡/1.  
selecting its number.  
7 For DVD (title, chapter):  
Each time you press the button, the search speed changes as  
While stopped (the title number is selected.)  
During playback (the chapter number is selected.)  
follows;  
Forward:  
For Video CD/SVCD (track): During playback without PBC  
function  
*
*
For Audio CD/MP3/JPEG (track/file): During playback or while  
stopped  
Reverse:  
On the remote control:  
Press number buttons (1-10, +10) to select  
the desired title, chapter or track number.  
Examples:  
To select 3: Press 3.  
*
and  
are only available for DVD.  
To return to normal speed playback  
Press 3 (play button).  
To select 14:Press +10, then 4.  
To select 24:Press +10 twice, then 4.  
To select 40:Press +10 three times, then 10.  
The specified title, chapter, track or file number appears on the  
display window and playback begins from that location.  
On the remote control and the center unit:  
Press and hold ¢/4.  
Continuously pressing ¢/4 increases the fast-forward/reverse  
search speed as follows;  
NOTE  
• While playing a DVD, if a menu is shown on the TV screen, number  
buttons may be used for selecting an item in the menu. (A pg. 32)  
• While playing a Video CD or SVCD with the PBC function, if a menu  
is shown on the TV screen, number buttons are used for selecting an  
item in the menu. (A pg. 33)  
To return to normal speed playback  
Release the button.  
NOTE  
• When a DVD, Video CD or SVCD is played back, no sound comes  
out during fast-forward/reverse search.  
• When an Audio CD is played back, sound is intermittent and low  
during fast-forward/reverse search.  
• This function may not work for some DVDs.  
Locating the beginning of a desired  
selection  
You can locate the  
beginning of a  
chapter, track or file.  
7 For DVD (chapter): During playback  
For Video CD/SVCD (track): During playback without PBC  
function  
For Audio CD/MP3/JPEG (track/file): During playback or while  
stopped  
To skip chapters, tracks or files forward  
Press ¢ as many times as required.  
To skip to the beginning of the current chapter, track or  
file  
Press 4 once.  
To skip chapters, tracks or files backward  
Press 4 as many times as required.  
NOTE  
• This function may not work for some DVDs.  
• When playing a Video CD or SVCD with the PBC function,  
and  
¢
may be used for the operations of menu-driven playback.  
4
(A pg. 4, 33)  
• When playing back an MP3/JPEG disc, you can make operations  
using the MP3/JPEG control display. (A pg. 34, 35)  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Tuner operations  
You can browse through all the stations or use the preset function to  
go immediately to a particular station.  
Manual tuning  
On the remote control:  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
1 Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO.  
2 Press FM/AM.  
1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the  
band.  
Each time you press the button, the band alternates between  
FM and AM.  
The selected band appears on the display window, then the last  
received station appears.  
Example:When AM is selected  
Remote control  
mode selector  
After a few seconds  
2 Press TUNING ª or TUNING ·  
repeatedly until you find the frequency  
you want.  
When you hold down the button until the system starts  
searching for stations and then release it, the system stops  
searching automatically when a station of sufficient signal  
strength is tuned in to.  
TUNING ª: Increases frequency.  
TUNING ·: Decreases frequency.  
NOTE  
• When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the TUNED  
indicator lights on the display window.  
Number buttons  
• When an FM stereo program is received, the ST indicator lights on the  
display window.  
Preset tuning  
Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be  
quickly tuned in. You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.  
7 To preset the stations  
NOTE  
Before you start operation;  
• There is a time limit when doing the following steps. If the setting is  
cancelled before you finish, start from step 2 again.  
1 Tune in the station you want to preset.  
• For the detailed procedure, see “Manual tuning”.  
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for an FM  
station, select the reception mode you want. See “Selecting  
the FM reception mode” (A pg. 26).  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Tuner operations  
2 Press MEMORY.  
Selecting the FM  
reception mode  
The channel number position starts flashing on the display  
window for about 5 seconds.  
When the stereo FM program currently tuned in is noisy, you can  
change the FM reception mode to improve the reception.  
You can store the FM reception mode for each preset station. See  
“Preset tuning” (A pg. 25).  
While the channel number position is flashing:  
3 Press number button(s) (1-10, +10) to  
7 While listening to an FM station  
On the remote control:  
Press FM MODE.  
select a channel number.  
The channel number and the CH indicator start flashing.  
Examples:  
For channel number 3: Press 3.  
For channel number 14: Press +10, then 4.  
The FM reception mode appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode alternates  
between AUTO MUTING” and “MONO”.  
(For FM stations only)  
For channel number 24: Press +10 twice, then 4.  
For channel number 30: Press +10 twice, then 10.  
• AUTO MUTING:  
When a program is broadcast in stereo, you will hear stereo  
sound. (The ST indicator lights on the display window.) When in  
monaural, you will hear monaural sound. This mode is also  
useful to suppress static noise between stations. The AUTO  
MUTING indicator lights on the display window.  
• MONO:  
Reception will be improved although you will lose the stereo  
effect. (The ST indicator goes off.) In this mode, you will hear  
noise until you are tuned in to a station. (The AUTO MUTING  
indicator also goes off.)  
While the selected number is flashing:  
4 Press MEMORY again.  
The selected number stops flashing.  
5 RThee pstaetiaont iss taesspigsned1totothe4seulenctetdilpyreoseut nusmtoberr.e all  
Reducing the noise of AM  
broadcast  
When listening to an AM broadcast with a lot of noise interference,  
you can change the Beat Cut mode to reduce the noise.  
the stations you want.  
To erase a stored preset station  
Storing a new station to a used number erases the previously stored  
one.  
7 To tune in to a preset station  
On the remote control:  
7 While listening to an AM station  
On the remote control:  
Press FM MODE.  
The current Beat Cut mode appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the Beat Cut mode alternates  
between “BEAT CUT 1” and “BEAT CUT 2”.  
• Choose “BEAT CUT 1” or “BEAT CUT 2” according to which  
gives clearer sound.  
1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the  
band.  
Each time you press the button, the band alternates between  
2 FPMreansdsAnMu. mber button(s) (1-10, +10) to  
select a preset channel number.  
Examples:  
For channel number 3: Press 3.  
For channel number 14: Press +10, then 4.  
(For FM stations only)  
For channel number 24: Press +10 twice, then 4.  
For channel number 30: Press +10 twice, then 10.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Creating realistic sound fields  
You can use the following surround modes to reproduce a realistic  
sound field.  
• Dolby Surround  
7 DTS Digital Surround**  
Used to reproduce multichannel soundtracks of the software  
encoded with DTS Digital Surround (  
).  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
Dolby Digital  
DTS Digital Surround (DTS) is another discrete multichannel  
digital audio format available on CD, LD and DVD software.  
Compared to Dolby Digital, audio compression ratio is relatively  
low. This fact allows DTS Digital Surround format to add breadth  
and depth to the reproduced sounds. As a result, DTS Digital  
Surround features natural, solid and clear sound.  
• DTS Digital Surround  
• DSP modes  
DAP modes  
All Channel Stereo  
7 Dolby Surround  
Dolby Pro Logic II*  
7 DSP modes  
DAP (Digital Acoustic Processor) modes  
DAP modes have been designed to create important acoustic  
surround elements.  
The sound heard in a live club, dance club, hall or pavilion consists  
of direct sound and indirect sound — early reflections and  
reflections from behind. Direct sounds reach the listener directly  
without any reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are  
delayed by the distances of the ceiling and walls (see the diagram  
below).  
These indirect sounds are important elements of the acoustic  
surround effects. The DAP mode can reproduce a realistic sound  
field by adding these indirect sounds.  
Dolby Pro Logic II has a newly developed multichannel playback  
format to decode all 2 channel sources — stereo source and Dolby  
Surround encoded source — into a 5.1 channel.  
The matrix-based encoding/decoding method used by Dolby Pro  
Logic II makes no limitation for the cutoff frequency of the treble  
from surround channel and enables stereo surround sound  
compared to conventional Dolby Pro Logic.  
Dolby Pro Logic II enables to reproduce spacious sound from  
original sound without adding any new sounds and tonal coloration.  
Dolby Pro Logic II has two modes — Movie mode and Music  
mode:  
• Pro Logic II Movie (PL II MOVIE)  
Suitable for reproduction of Dolby Surround encoded sources  
The following DAP modes are provided with this system.  
bearing the mark  
close to the one created with discrete 5.1 channel sounds.  
• Pro Logic II Music (PL II MUSIC)  
. You can enjoy soundfield very  
Gives the feeling of a live music club with a  
low ceiling.  
LIVE CLUB  
DANCE CLUB  
HALL  
Gives a throbbing bass beat.  
Suitable for reproduction of any 2 channel stereo music sources.  
You can enjoy wide and deep sound by using this mode.  
• When Dolby Pro Logic II is activated, the GPLII indicator  
lights on the display window.  
Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a concert  
hall.  
Gives the spacious feeling of a pavilion with a  
high ceiling.  
PAVILION  
Dolby Digital*  
Used to reproduce multichannel soundtracks of the software  
These DAP modes can be used to add the acoustic surround effects  
while reproducing 2 channel stereo source, and can give you a real  
“being there” feeling.  
• When one of the DAP modes is selected, the DSP indicator lights  
on the display window.  
encoded with Dolby Digital (  
).  
Dolby Digital 5.1 ch (DOLBY D) encoding method (so-called  
discrete multichannel digital audio format) records and digitally  
compresses the front left channel, front right channel, center  
channel, surround left channel, surround right channel and LFE  
channel signals.  
Since each channel is completely independent from the other  
channel signals to avoid interference, you can obtain much better  
sound quality with much stereo and surround effects.  
NOTE  
• Dolby Digital software can be roughly grouped into two categories-  
multichannel (up to “5.1” channel) and 2 channel software. To enjoy  
surround sounds while playing Dolby Digital 2 ch software, you can  
use Dolby Pro Logic II.  
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
** “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered  
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Creating realistic sound fields  
Creating sound field  
7 Indicators on the display window  
Digital signal format indicators  
Reflections from behind  
LPCM:  
Lights when Linear PCM signal comes in.  
Early reflections  
GDIGITAL: Lights when Dolby Digital signals come in.  
C:  
Lights when DTS Digital (Surround) signals come  
in.  
No indication: No digital signal indicator lights when analog  
signals come in.  
Source signal indicators, etc.  
Light to indicate the incoming signals.  
a:  
Lights when the left channel signal comes  
in.  
b:  
c:  
d:  
g:  
i:  
h:  
Lights when the center channel signal comes in.  
Lights when the right channel signal comes in.  
Lights when the LFE channel signal comes in.  
Lights when the surround left channel signal comes in.  
Lights when the surround right channel signal comes in.  
Lights when the monaural surround channel signal or 2  
channel Dolby Surround signal comes in.  
: Always lights.  
Direct sounds  
All Channel Stereo  
All Channel Stereo (ALL CH ST.) mode can reproduce a larger  
stereo sound field using all the connected (and activated) speakers.  
All Channel Stereo can be used while reproducing 2 channel stereo  
source.  
• When All Channel Stereo is selected, the DSP indicator lights on  
the display window.  
The channel with “ ” shows that the corresponding speakers are  
reproducing the channels’ sound.  
If the channels’ sound decoded into 5.1 channel is reproduced, only  
” lights.  
All Channel Stereo reproduction  
Normal stereo sound  
All Channel Stereo  
Available Surround modes for each input signal  
The B marks show available surround modes.  
DSP mode  
DAP mode  
Mode  
Dolby Surround  
DTS Digital  
Surround  
(DTS)  
Surround off  
(SURR OFF)  
ALL CH  
ST.*  
PL II  
MOVIE*  
PL II  
MUSIC*  
Dolby  
Digital  
LIVE  
CLUB*  
DANCE  
HALL* PAVILION*  
Signal  
CLUB*  
Dolby Digital  
B
B
B
(Multichannel)  
Dolby Digital  
(2 channel)  
B
B
DTS Digital  
Surround  
(Multichannel)  
B
B
DTS Digital  
Surround  
B
B
B
B
B
B
(2 channel)  
Analog (VCR/FM/  
AM) or Linear PCM  
B
B
B
B
B
* You can select these modes by pressing SURROUND (MODE). (A pg. 29)  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Creating realistic sound fields  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO.  
Using the surround mode  
The system is set up to automatically select the optimal surround  
mode for input signal from digital multichannel software.  
When playing back 2 channel source, you can select the desired  
surround mode manually.  
On the remote control:  
Remote control  
mode selector  
7 When playing back digital multichannel software  
The appropriate multichannel surround mode is automatically  
activated.  
“DOLBY D”:When a software encoded with Dolby Digital is  
played back  
“DTS”:  
When a software encoded with DTS Digital  
Surround is played back  
In these cases, you can only turn on or off (“SURR OFF”) the  
surround mode.  
7 When playing back 2 channel source  
You can select either mode of Dolby Pro Logic II (PL II MOVIE/  
PL II MUSIC) or one of the DSP modes (LIVE CLUB/DANCE  
CLUB/HALL/PAVILION/ALL CH ST.).  
Press SURROUND (MODE).  
The surround mode is turned on and the current surround mode  
appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the surround mode changes as  
follows;  
] PL II MOVIE ] PL II MUSIC ] LIVE CLUB ] DANCE  
CLUB ] HALL ] PAVILION ] ALL CH ST. ] (back to the  
beginning)  
For details on each mode, see pages 27 and 28.  
To turn off the surround mode  
Press SURROUND (ON/OFF).  
Each time you press the button, the surround mode turns on and off  
alternately.  
SURR OFF (surround off) O current selected mode  
(surround on)  
NOTE  
• When selecting “PL II MUSIC”, “PL II MOVIE”, “DOLBY D” or  
“DTS” as the surround mode, the SURROUND indicator lights.  
• When selecting one of the DSP modes (“LIVE CLUB”/“DANCE  
CLUB”/“HALL”/“PAVILION”/“ALL CH ST.”) as the surround  
mode, the DSP indicator lights.  
• For Dolby Digital 2 channel software, you can select “PL II MUSIC”  
or “PL II MOVIE”.  
Storing adjustments — auto memory  
This system memorizes the surround mode settings for each source.  
• When you turn the power off:  
When turning the power on again, the memorized settings for the  
current source are automatically recalled.  
• When you change the source:  
The memorized settings for the newly selected source are  
automatically recalled.  
NOTE  
• If the source is FM or AM, you can assign a different setting for each  
band.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Creating realistic sound fields  
Adjusting the sound  
On the remote control:  
1 Press TEST.  
Check if you can hear the sounds through all the speakers at  
the equal level.  
“TEST TONE” and the corresponding signal indicator starts  
flashing on the display window, and the test tone comes out of  
the speakers in the following order;  
] Front left speaker (a) ] Center speaker (b) ]  
Front right speaker (c) ] Surround right speaker  
(i) ] Surround left speaker (g) ] (back to the  
beginning)  
2 Adjust the speaker output levels (–10 to  
+10).  
Adjust the center speaker and surround speaker levels as much  
as the sound from the front speakers. Use one of the following  
buttons to adjust each speaker level.  
CENTER +/– for the center speaker  
SURR-L +/– for the surround left speaker  
3 PrSeUsRsR-TRE+/STforathgeasuinrrotuondsritgohtpsptehakeer test tone.  
7 For DAP modes (A pg. 27) only  
4 Press EFFECT to select the effect level  
(1 to 5) you want.  
Each time you press the button, the effect level changes as  
follows;  
] DSP EFFECT 1 ] DSP EFFECT 2 ] DSP EFFECT 3  
] DSP EFFECT 4 ] DSP EFFECT 5 ] (back to the  
beginning)  
As the number increases, the selected mode will be more  
effective. (Normally set the level to “DSP EFFECT 3”.)  
NOTE  
• You cannot adjust the center speaker output level for the DAP modes  
and the effect level for All Channel Stereo.  
• You can output the test tone in any surround mode, or even when  
surround mode is not activated.  
• Speaker output levels whose source signal indicator is lit can be  
adjusted without pressing TEST.  
• When selecting DVD as the source, you can also adjust the speaker  
output levels using the choice menu. (A pg. 47)  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced operations  
This section explains advanced operations for disc playback using  
the remote control.  
7 Contents of the on-screen bar during playback  
DVD  
shows the types of discs an operation is  
available for.  
• Turn on your TV and select the correct input mode on the TV.  
NOTE  
• If B” appears on the TV screen when pressing a button, the disc  
cannot accept an operation you have tried to do or information  
required for that operation is not recorded to the disc.  
Video CD  
SVCD  
CD  
Using the on-screen bar  
You can check disc information while the disc is loaded and you  
can use some functions using the on-screen bar.  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
1 Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO.  
2 Press DVD.  
Cursor  
(3/2///5)  
/ENTER  
MP3 disc  
Showing the on-screen bar  
7 Whenever a disc is loaded  
Press ON SCREEN.  
A Shows disc type.  
B Shows current transfer rate (Megabits per second).  
C Shows disc number.  
D Shows current title (for DVD) or group (for MP3) number.  
E Shows current chapter number (for DVD) or track number (for  
other type of discs).  
Each time you press the button, the on-screen bar changes as  
follows on the TV screen.  
Example:During DVD playback  
F Shows time information. (A pg. 32)  
G Shows playback status.  
:
appears during playback.  
/
: appears during fast forward/reverse.  
/
: appears during playback in forward slow-motion/  
reverse slow-motion.  
:
appears when paused.  
:
appears when stopped.  
H Select this to change time information (F). (A pg. 32)  
I Select this to change audio language or channel. (A pg. 37, 38)  
J Select this for Repeat Playback. (A pg. 42)  
K Select this to change subtitle language. (A pg. 37)  
L Select this for time search function. (A pg. 34)  
M Select this to change view angle. (A pg. 36)  
OFF  
(The on-screen bar disappears)  
(back to the beginning)  
N Select this for chapter search function. (A pg. 33)  
O Select this for Program Playback. (A pg. 41)  
P Select this for Random Playback. (A pg. 42)  
• The on-screen bar displays “NO-DISC” if no disc is loaded.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced operations  
Example:During DVD playback  
Basic operation on the on-screen bar  
Example:When selecting the Repeat mode of DVD  
(back to the beginning)  
7 During playback or while stopped  
• TIME: Elapsed playing time of current chapter/track  
• REM: Remaining time of current chapter/track  
• TOTAL: Elapsed time of disc  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
• The currently selected item shows green.  
• T. REM: Remaining time of disc  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
NOTE  
• While playing a Video CD, SVCD or Audio CD, the hour digit  
indication does not appear.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to move H to  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
The pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
• The current setting appears.  
Playing from a specified  
position on a disc  
You can start playing a title, chapter or track you specify. You can  
also play a disc from specified time.  
4 Press Cursor //5 to select the desired  
Cursor  
(3/2///5)  
/ENTER  
option.  
Each time you press the button, the options change.  
Locating a desired scene from the DVD  
menu  
DVDs generally have their own menus which show disc  
contents. These menus contain various items such as titles  
of movies, names of songs or artist information, and you  
can display them on the TV screen. You can locate a desired scene  
by using these menus.  
5 Press ENTER.  
The setting changes and the pop-up window disappears.  
7 Whenever a DVD is loaded  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
1 Press TOP MENU or MENU.  
The menu appears on the TV screen.  
NOTE  
Example:  
• See the corresponding pages for details on each function.  
Changing the time information  
You can change the time information  
in the on-screen bar on the TV screen  
and the display window of the center  
unit.  
Normally, a DVD which contains more than one title will have  
a “title” menu which lists the titles. Press TOP MENU to show  
the title menu.  
Some DVDs may also have a different menu which is shown  
by pressing MENU.  
7 During playback or while stopped  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
2 PThreeosn-sscrCeeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmVoscvreeenH. to  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
See the instructions for each DVD regarding its particular  
2 mUesneu. Cursor 3/2///5 to select a  
Each time you press the button, the time information changes  
as follows;  
desired item.  
3 Press ENTER.  
The system starts playback of the selected item.  
• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the  
corresponding number using number buttons.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced operations  
Locating a desired chapter using the on-  
screen bar  
When playing back a DVD, you can locate the chapter  
number to be played using the on-screen bar.  
Cursor  
(3/2///5)  
/ENTER  
7 During playback  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
2 PThreeosn-sscCreeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2ontthoe mTVoscvreeenH. to  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
Number buttons  
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
Locating a desired scene using a Video  
CD/SVCD menu with PBC  
A Video CD or SVCD recorded with PBC has its  
own menus such as a list of contained songs. You  
can locate a specific scene by using these menus.  
(A pg. 4)  
4 Press number buttons (0-10) to enter  
the desired chapter number.  
Example:  
To select 8: Press 8.  
To select 10: Press 10.  
To select 20: Press 2, then 0.  
To select 37: Press 3, then 7.  
7 When the menu appears on the TV screen during playback with  
PBC function  
Press number buttons (1-10, +10) to select  
the number of the desired item.  
The system starts playback from the selected item.  
To correct a misentry  
Repeat step 4 until the correct number appears in the pop-up  
window.  
5 Press ENTER.  
Example:  
The system starts playback from the selected chapter.  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
NOTE  
• The +10 button is not used by this function.  
• You can select up to the 99th chapter.  
To select the number  
Example:  
Locating a desired title/group using  
number buttons  
To select 3: Press 3.  
To select 11: Press +10, then 1.  
When playing back a disc with more than  
one title or one group, you can specify a  
desired title or group to be played using  
number buttons.  
To return to the menu  
Press RETURN.  
When “NEXT” or “PREVIOUS” is shown on the TV  
screen:  
To go to the next page, press ¢.  
1 Press TITLE/GROUP.  
“_ _” is shown in the title/group display area in the display  
window.  
To return to the previous page, press 4.  
NOTE  
Example:During DVD playback  
• If you want to play a PBC-compatible Video CD/SVCD without  
using the PBC function, perform any of the following:  
Start playback by pressing number buttons while stopped.  
Press ¢ repeatedly until the desired track number is displayed,  
then start playback by pressing 3 (play button).  
The track number appears on the display window instead of  
“PBC”.  
• To activate the PBC function when playing a PBC-compatible Video  
CD/SVCD without using the PBC function, perform any of the  
following:  
Press TOP MENU or MENU.  
Press 7 twice to stop playback, then press 3 (play button).  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced operations  
2 Use number buttons (0-10, +10) to enter  
NOTE  
the desired title or group number.  
• You can also use the 10 button to enter “0”.  
• The +10 button is not used by this function.  
• You can specify time in hours/minutes/seconds for DVD and in  
minutes/seconds for Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD.  
The system starts playback from the first chapter/track/file of  
the selected title/group.  
Example:  
To select 8: Press 8.  
To select 10: Press 10.  
Or press +10, then 0.  
To select 20: Press +10, then 10.  
Using the MP3 control  
display  
You can search and play desired groups and tracks using the MP3  
control display.  
Or press +10 twice, then 0.  
To select 25: Press +10 twice, then 5.  
• Specify the number within 5 seconds after pressing TITLE/  
GROUP (i.e. while the display window shows “_ _” for the  
title/group number, instead of the current number).  
You can also specify the desired chapter/track/file by using  
number button. (A pg. 24)  
7
MP3 control display  
The MP3 control display appears on the TV screen and playback  
starts when a MP3 disc is selected.  
NOTE  
Total group number on Current track  
disc number  
Total track number in  
current group  
• This function may not work for some DVDs.  
*
Locating a desired position by specifying  
the time  
You can start playing at your desired  
position by specifying the elapsed  
playing time from the beginning of  
the current title (for DVD), or from the beginning of the disc (for  
Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD).  
7 For DVD:  
During playback  
For Video CD/SVCD:  
Current group  
number  
Current track Total track number on  
disc  
While stopped or during playback without PBC function  
For Audio CD:  
During playback or while stopped  
Current group  
* Elapsed playing time of current track  
Elapsed playing time is only shown during playback.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
2 PThreeosn-sscrCeeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmVoscvreeenH. to  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
(play button)  
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
Cursor  
(3/2///5)  
/ENTER  
4 Use number buttons (0-9) to enter the  
Number buttons  
time.  
Example:  
To play back from a point 2 (hours): 34 (minutes): 08  
7 During playback  
(seconds) elapsed  
1 Press Cursor //5 to select the desired  
group.  
Press 2  
Press 4  
Press 3  
Press 0  
2 Press Cursor 3 to select the track list.  
3 Press Cursor //5 to select the desired  
track.  
Press 8  
The playback starts from the selected track.  
To correct a misentry  
If you select the track while stopped  
Press Cursor 2 repeatedly until the wrong number is erased,  
Press ENTER or 3 (play button) to start playback of the selected  
then press number buttons to enter the correct numbers.  
track.  
5 Press ENTER.  
The system starts playback from the specified time.  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
Continued on next page  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced operations  
To select the other group  
Press Cursor 2 to return to the group list, then press Cursor //5  
to select the desired group.  
(play button)  
To skip groups/tracks during playback  
Press Cursor / repeatedly for forward-skip.  
Press Cursor 5 repeatedly for reverse-skip.  
Cursor  
(3/2///5)  
/ENTER  
To start playback by specifying the track number  
Press number buttons (0-10, +10) to enter  
the track number.  
Example:  
To select 3: Press 3.  
Number buttons  
To select 14: Press +10, then 4.  
To select 20: Press +10, then 10.  
7 While stopped  
Or press +10 twice, then 0.  
To select 24: Press +10 twice, then 4.  
To select 110:Press +10 ten times, then 10.  
The entered number appears in the track number indication and  
playback starts from the track you have specified.  
1 Press Cursor //5 to select the desired  
group.  
2 Press Cursor 3 to select the file list.  
NOTE  
3 Press Cursor //5 to select the desired  
• You can also check playback information on the display window.  
(A pg. 22)  
• Some group and track names may not be displayed correctly  
depending on recording conditions.  
• The order of groups and tracks on an MP3 disc may be displayed  
differently from the order displayed on your personal computer.  
• Up to 12 groups and tracks are displayed at once. Pressing Cursor  
//5 repeatedly scrolls the display to show the hidden groups and  
tracks one by one.  
file.  
4 Press 3 (play button) to start the slide-  
show playback from the selected file.  
To show only the selected file  
Press ENTER.  
• When a still picture is completely shown on the TV screen, you  
can zoom in on areas in the still picture. (A pg. 39)  
To select the other group  
Press Cursor 2 to return to the group list, then press Cursor //5  
to select the desired group.  
Using the JPEG control  
display  
You can search and show desired groups and files using the JPEG  
control display.  
To start the slide-show playback by specifying the file  
number  
Press number buttons (0-10, +10) to enter  
the file number.  
Example:  
To select 3: Press 3.  
7
JPEG control display  
The JPEG control display appears on the TV screen when stopping  
playback of a JPEG disc.  
Total group number on Current file  
disc number  
Total file number in  
current group  
To select 14: Press +10, then 4.  
To select 20: Press +10, then 10.  
Or press +10 twice, then 0.  
To select 24: Press +10 twice, then 4.  
To select 110:Press +10 ten times, then 10.  
The entered number appears in the file number indication and the  
slide-show playback starts from the file you have specified.  
To return to the JPEG control display  
Press MENU.  
NOTE  
• Some group and file names may not be displayed correctly depending  
on recording conditions.  
• The order of groups and files on a JPEG disc may be displayed  
differently from the order displayed on your personal computer.  
• Up to 12 groups and files are displayed at once. Pressing Cursor //5  
repeatedly scrolls the display to show the hidden groups and files one  
by one.  
Current group  
number  
Current group  
Current file  
Total file number on  
disc  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced operations  
When using the on-screen bar:  
Selecting a view angle of  
DVD  
While playing back a DVD containing multi-view angles, you can  
enjoy the same scene at different angles.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
2 PThreeosn-sscCreeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmVoscvreeenH. to  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
Example:The first view angle is selected out of 3 view angles  
recorded.  
Cursor  
(3/2///5)  
/ENTER  
4 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
the desired view angle.  
5 EParceh stimseEyoNuTprEesRs t.he button, the angle of the scene changes.  
Selecting a view angle  
7 During playback  
The pop-up window disappears.  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
When using the ANGLE button:  
1 Press ANGLE.  
The following pop-up window appears on the TV screen.  
Example:The first view angle is selected out of 3 view angles  
recorded.  
2 Press ANGLE repeatedly to select the  
desired view angle.  
Each time you press the button, the angle of the scene changes.  
Example:  
] 1/3 ] 2/3 ] 3/3 ] (back to the beginning)  
The pop-up window disappears if no operation is done for  
about 5 seconds.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced operations  
When using the on-screen bar:  
Selecting the subtitle/  
audio languages  
When playing back a DVD (or SVCD) containing subtitles in  
several languages, you can select the subtitle language to be  
displayed on the TV screen.  
When a DVD contains audio (sound track) in several languages,  
you can also select the language (sound track) to listen to.  
You can also select specific audio channel(s) on Video CDs/  
SVCDs.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
2 PThreeosn-sscCreeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmVoscvreeenH. to  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
Example (DVD):“ENGLISH” is selected out of 3 subtitle  
languages recorded.  
Cursor  
(3/2///5)  
/ENTER  
4 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
the desired subtitle language.  
5 EParceh stimseEyoNuTprEesRs t.he button, the subtitle language changes.  
The pop-up window disappears.  
Selecting the subtitle language  
7 During playback  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
When using the SUBTITLE button:  
Selecting the audio language  
7 During playback  
1 Press SUBTITLE.  
The following pop-up window appears on the TV screen.  
When using the AUDIO button:  
Example (DVD):“ENGLISH” is selected out of 3 subtitle  
languages recorded.  
1 Press AUDIO.  
The following pop-up window appears on the TV screen.  
Example:ENGLISH” is selected out of 3 audio languages  
recorded.  
2 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select  
the desired subtitle language.  
Each time you press the button, the subtitle language changes.  
2 Press AUDIO repeatedly to select the  
For SVCD  
desired audio language.  
SUBTITLE changes the subtitles regardless of whether the  
subtitles are recorded or not. (Subtitles will not change if no  
subtitle is recorded.)  
Each time you press the button, the audio languages change.  
The pop-up window disappears if no operation is done for  
about 5 seconds.  
NOTE  
The pop-up window disappears if no operation is done for  
about 5 seconds.  
• Some audio languages are abbreviated in the pop-up window. See  
“The language codes list” (A pg. 46).  
NOTE  
When using the on-screen bar:  
• Some subtitle languages are abbreviated in the pop-up window. See  
“The language codes list” (A pg. 46).  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
2 PThreeosn-sscCreeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmVoscvreeenH. to  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
Example:ENGLISH” is selected out of 3 audio languages  
recorded.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced operations  
When using the on-screen bar:  
4 Press Cursor //5 to select the desired  
audio language.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
5 EParceh stimseEyoNuTprEesRs t.he button, the audio language changes.  
2 PThreeosn-sscCreeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmVoscvreeenH. to  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
The pop-up window disappears.  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
Example:ST” (stereo) is selected out of 3 audio channels  
recorded.  
NOTE  
• Some audio languages are abbreviated in the pop-up window. See  
“The language codes list” (A pg. 46).  
Selecting the audio channel  
4 Press Cursor //5 to select the desired  
When you play certain karaoke (Video CD/SVCD),  
you can enjoy karaoke by selecting the audio  
channel to play.  
audio channel(s).  
5 EParceh stimseEyoNuTprEesRs t.he button, the audio channel changes.  
• The sound of each audio channel depends on the contents of the  
disc.  
The pop-up window disappears.  
7 During playback  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
When using the AUDIO button:  
1 Press AUDIO.  
The following pop-up window appears on the TV screen.  
Example:ST” (stereo) is selected out of 3 audio channels  
recorded.  
2 Press AUDIO repeatedly to select the  
desired audio channel.  
Each time you press the button, the audio channel changes.  
Example for Video CD:  
] ST ] L ] R ] (back to the beginning)  
• ST: To listen to normal stereo playback.  
• L: To listen to L (left) audio channel only.  
• R: To listen to R (right) audio channel only.  
Example for SVCD:  
] ST 1 ] ST 2 ] L 1 ] R 1 ] L 2 ] R 2 ] (back to  
the beginning)  
• ST 1/ST 2:  
To listen to normal stereo playback of ST 1 or 2 channel.  
• L 1/L 2:  
To listen to L (left) 1 or 2 audio channel.  
• R 1/R 2:  
To listen to R (right) 1 or 2 audio channel.  
The pop-up window disappears if no operation is done for  
about 5 seconds.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced operations  
To return to normal playback  
Press 3 (play button).  
Special picture playback  
This system provides special picture playback functions including  
frame-by-frame, slow-motion and zoom.  
NOTE  
• Sound cannot be heard during slow-motion playback.  
Zooming in  
(play button)  
7 During playback or while paused  
1 Press ZOOM.  
Each time you press ZOOM, scene magnification changes as  
follows;  
] x 1 (normal size) ] x 1.8 ] x 4 ] x 8 ] x 16 ] x 32  
] x 64 ] (back to the beginning)  
Cursor  
(3/2///5)  
/ENTER  
Example:When x4 zoom is selected.  
Current  
magnification  
Frame-by-frame playback  
7 During playback  
Zoomed-in  
area  
Press 8 repeatedly.  
Each time you press the button, the still  
picture advances by one frame.  
2 While zoomed in, press Cursor 3/2///  
5 to move zoom-in area.  
To return to normal playback  
Press 3 (play button).  
NOTE  
• You can perform the above operation using the buttons on the center  
unit.  
Playing back in slow-motion  
7 During playback  
1 Press 8 at the point  
To return to normal playback  
Press ENTER.  
where you want to start playback in  
slow-motion from.  
NOTE  
2 PThreessysstem¡pau.ses playback.  
• Picture may look coarse while zoomed in.  
• Playback in forward slow-motion starts.  
For DVD only:  
To play back in reverse slow-motion, press 1.  
Each time you press the button, the playback speed become  
faster and on-screen guide icon changes as follows;  
Forward:  
Reverse:  
To pause slow-motion playback  
Press 8.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced operations  
4 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select a  
Changing the VFP setting  
The VFP (Video Fine Processor) function  
enables you to adjust the picture character  
according to the type of programming,  
picture tone or personal preference.  
parameter you want to adjust.  
Adjust gradually and confirm picture appearance results are as  
preferred.  
• GAMMA (–4 to +4):  
Controls brightness of neutral tints while maintaining  
brightness of dark and bright portions.  
• BRIGHTNESS (–16 to +16):  
Controls screen brightness.  
• CONTRAST (–16 to +16):  
Controls screen contrast.  
NOTE  
Before you start operation;  
• The VFP setting screen disappears if no operations are done for more  
than about 10 seconds. If the setting screen disappears before you  
finish, start from step 1 again.  
• SATURATION (–16 to +16):  
Controls screen color depth.  
• TINT (–16 to +16):  
Controls screen tint.  
• SHARPNESS (+0 to +3):  
Controls screen sharpness.  
7
To select a VFP mode  
1 Press VFP during playback.  
The current VFP settings appear on the TV screen.  
Example:When “NORMAL” is selected.  
• Y DELAY (–2 to +2):  
Controls screen color gap.  
5 Press ENTER.  
VFP menu disappears and the following pop-up window  
appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 repeatedly to select  
the VFP mode.  
Each time you press the button, the VFP mode changes as  
follows;  
6 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to change  
the setting.  
O NORMAL O CINEMA O USER 1 O USER 2 O (back  
to the beginning)  
7 Press ENTER.  
• NORMAL:Normally select this.  
• CINEMA: Suitable for movies.  
• USER 1 and USER 2:  
You can adjust parameters that affect picture appearance and  
store settings. Go to step 3.  
8 TRhee pcuerraentt sVtFePpsesttin4gstoapp7eatroagaaind.just other  
parameters.  
To return to the normal screen  
Press VFP.  
NOTE  
• You cannot adjust the parameters of “NORMAL” and “CINEMA”.  
Press VFP to return to normal screen.  
To activate your setting  
Press VFP, then press Cursor 3/2 repeatedly to select “USER 1”  
or “USER 2” that you have changed the parameters.  
7
3TPoraedsjusstCpuicrtsuroera3pp/e2ararnecpeemaatneudallylyto select  
USER 1or USER 2.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced operations  
Example for 4 A  
Program Playback  
You can play up to 99 titles  
(for DVD) or tracks (for other  
types of discs) in any order  
from among multiple discs. You may program the same title or  
track more than once.  
Example for 4 B  
Selected title/track  
number  
Selected group number  
Selected disc number  
(play button)  
5 Repeat step 4 to program following  
orders.  
Cursor  
(3/2///5)  
/ENTER  
Each time you enter a title/track number in the order at the  
bottom of the program menu, the program menu scrolls and  
the following orders appear.  
To erase an order  
Press Cursor //5 to move H to the order to be erased, then  
Number buttons  
6 pPrersessCsAN3CE(Lp. lay button) to start Program  
Playback.  
When all of the programmed titles/tracks have been played  
back, playback stops and the program menu appears again.  
Note that program setting remains.  
7 While stopped  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
When playing back an Audio CD:  
The program menu remains on the TV screen during Program  
Playback.  
2 PThreeosn-sscrCeeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmVoscvreeenH. to  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
To check the program contents  
During playback, press 7. Playback stops and the program menu  
appears.  
To bring up the menu without stopping playback, carry out steps 1  
to 3.  
The program menu appears on the TV screen.  
• 10 orders appear at a time.  
You can also check playback status in the on-screen bar by  
pressing ON SCREEN.  
To stop Program Playback  
Press 7. Note that program setting remains.  
To clear the program  
While stopped and the program menu is shown on the TV screen,  
press 7.  
4 A: When programming titles/tracks of DVD/Video CD/  
SVCD/Audio CD  
All of the programmed titles/tracks are erased. You can also clear  
the program by turning off the system.  
Press number buttons (1-10, +10) to  
specify selections by disc and title/  
track.  
• At each program order use number buttons to specify source  
disc number first, press ENTER, then specify title/track  
number on source disc.  
To quit the Program mode  
After clearing all programmed titles/tracks, press 3 (play button).  
The program menu disappears.  
NOTE  
• During Program Playback, you cannot edit program contents.  
• During Program Playback, pressing ¢ skips to the next program  
selection. Pressing 4 returns playback to the beginning of the  
current selection.  
• The Resume function cannot be used with Program Playback.  
• To close the program menu:  
Press ON SCREEN. The program menu is closed and the on-screen  
bar is shown.  
• To turn off the on-screen bar:  
Example: To specify “title 3/track 3” of “disc 2”  
Press 2 ] ENTER* ] 3  
* You can also use any number buttons instead of ENTER.  
(A number entered for a group number is invalid.)  
When you specify the currently selected disc number  
(A pg. 23), H skips group number column and moves to  
track number column automatically.  
B: When programming tracks of MP3 disc  
Press number buttons (1-10, +10) to  
specify selections by disc, group and  
track.  
• At each program order use number buttons to specify source  
disc number first, specify group number, then specify track  
number on source disc.  
Press ON SCREEN repeatedly.  
• Program Playback function cannot be used during Video CD/SVCD  
playback with PBC function.  
• If you want to repeat the programmed titles/tracks, set the Repeat  
mode during Program Playback. (A pg. 42)  
• Program Playback may not work for some discs.  
Example: To specify “track 14” in “group 2” of “disc 3”  
Press 3 ] 2 ] +10 ] 4  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced operations  
Repeating the current selection or all  
discs  
Random Playback  
You can play titles or tracks  
on a disc in random order.  
7 For DVD/Audio CD/MP3/JPEG:  
During playback  
For Video CD/SVCD:  
During playback without PBC function  
When using the REPEAT button:  
1 Press REPEAT.  
Cursor  
(3/2///5)  
/ENTER  
Each time you press REPEAT, the Repeat mode changes  
cyclically.  
• Repeat mode indicators appear on the display window and a  
repeat mode indication appears on the TV screen.  
7 While stopped  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
2 PThreeosn-sscrCeeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe TmVoscvreeenH. to  
.
Repeat mode indicator  
Example: For Audio CD  
Followings are the description of indicators on the display window  
and indications on the TV screen.  
Indicators  
Indications  
Meanings  
REPEAT  
GROUP*  
Repeats the current group for  
MP3/JPEG disc.  
3 Press ENTER.  
The system starts Random Playback.  
After playing all titles/tracks on the disc, the system stops  
playback and quits the Random mode.  
Repeats the current title for DVD.  
Repeats all tracks on the current  
disc for Video CD/SVCD/  
Audio CD/MP3/JPEG.  
When more than one discs are loaded, the system starts  
Random Playback of the next disc after completing current  
disc playback.  
REPEAT DISC*  
Repeats all the available discs.  
REPEAT ALL*  
To stop and quit Random Playback  
Press 7.  
You can also clear the Random mode by turning off the system.  
1
Repeats the current track for  
Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD/MP3  
disc.  
REPEAT TRACK  
NOTE  
Repeats the current chapter for  
DVD.  
• The same title/track will not be played back more than once during  
Random Playback.  
• To return to normal playback without stopping playback, carry out  
steps 1 to 3 above.  
No  
indication  
Repeat mode is off.  
The system plays back all  
available discs normally.  
* During playback of a JPEG disc, “REPEAT GROUP”, “REPEAT  
DISC” and “REPEAT ALL” do not appear on the TV screen.  
Repeat Playback  
You can repeat playback of the currently selected title or chapter  
(for DVD), track (for Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD), current group  
(for MP3/JPEG) or track (for MP3).  
To stop Repeat Playback  
Press 7.  
• When a disc except DVD is selected, the system stops playback  
but does not quit the Repeat mode.  
• When a DVD is set, the system stops playback and quits the  
Repeat mode.  
You can also repeat playback of a desired part.  
To quit the Repeat mode  
Press REPEAT until the Repeat mode indicator goes off from the  
display window.  
You can also clear the Repeat mode by changing the current disc  
except when in repeat all mode (ALL).  
Cursor  
(3/2///5)  
/ENTER  
Continued on next page  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced operations  
2 Press A-B REPEAT again at the end of  
NOTE  
• If you press REPEAT while stopped, you need to press 3 (play  
button) to start Repeat Playback.  
• When the Program mode is active with a Video CD, SVCD, Audio  
CD, the Repeat mode changes in the same manner.  
the part you want to repeat (point B).  
The repeat mode indicator on the display window changes to  
” and A-B Repeat Playback starts. The selected  
part of the disc (between point A and B) is played repeatedly.  
Note that, however, in the “  
” mode the system repeats all the  
programmed tracks, instead of all tracks on the disc.  
• During playback in the Repeat mode of the title/chapter/group/track,  
if you skip the title/chapter/group/track using ¢/4, etc., the  
destination title/chapter/group/track is repeated.  
• If B appears when pressing REPEAT during DVD playback, you  
cannot repeat the title or chapter because of disc contents.  
To cancel A-B Repeat Playback  
Press A-B REPEAT during A-B Repeat Playback.  
When using the on-screen bar (except for JPEG  
disc):  
When using the on-screen bar:  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
2 PThreeosn-sscCreeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2ontthoe mTVosvcreeenH. to  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
2 PThreeosn-sscCreeunrbsaroarpp3ear/s2on tthoe mTVoscvreeenH. to  
.
3 Press ENTER.  
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
The following pop-up window appears under the selected item.  
4 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
A-B.  
4 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
the Repeat mode.  
You can select the Repeat modes as follows:  
5 Press ENTER at the beginning of the  
For DVD  
part you want to repeat (point A).  
O CHAPTER O TITLE OALL O A-B O OFF O  
(back to the beginning)  
The following display appears in the on-screen bar.  
For Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD  
O TRACK O DISC O ALL O A-B O OFF O (back to  
the beginning)  
For MP3 disc  
6 Press ENTER at the end of the part you  
O TRACK O GROUP O DISC O ALL O OFF O  
want to repeat (point B).  
5 (Pbraeckstso EthNe TbeEgRin.ning)  
A-B Repeat Playback starts. The selected part of the disc  
(between point A and B) is played repeatedly.  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
To turn off the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
Press ON SCREEN.  
To cancel Repeat Playback  
Repeat from step 1, select “OFF” in step 4, then press ENTER.  
To cancel A-B Repeat Playback  
Repeat from step 1, select “OFF” in step 4, then press ENTER.  
NOTE  
Repeating a desired part  
You can repeat playback of a desired  
part by specifying the beginning  
(point A) and ending (point B).  
• When playing back a DVD, A-B Repeat Playback is possible only  
within the same title.  
• “A-B” cannot be selected during Program and Random Playback.  
• “A-B” cannot be selected while stopped.  
7 During playback  
When using the A-B REPEAT button:  
1 Press A-B REPEAT at the beginning of  
the part you want to repeat (point A).  
The repeat mode indicator “  
window.  
” appears on the display  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setting DVD preferences  
You can adjust the initial settings for DVD playback according to  
your preference or needs using 5 choice menus shown on the TV  
screen.  
: Audio menu (AUDIO) (A pg. 47)  
You can adjust sound settings.  
• Adjustments are possible only when selecting DVD as the  
source.  
Using the choice menus  
• Turn on your TV and select the correct input mode on the TV.  
You can only use the remote control for choice menu operations.  
You can change the language used in the choice menus.  
(A pg. 46)  
You cannot show the choice menus when an MP3 disc or a JPEG  
disc is accessed.  
: Speaker setting menu (SPK. SETTING)  
(A pg. 47)  
Choice menus  
You can make speaker settings according to the size and layout of  
your speakers.  
: Language menu (LANGUAGE) (A pg. 46)  
You can select the initial languages for the disc menu, audio and  
You can also adjust the output level of the subwoofer, center  
speaker and surround speakers.  
subtitles.  
You can also select the language used on the TV screen while  
operating this system.  
: Other setting menu (OTHERS) (A pg. 49)  
You can change settings for some of the functions. Also use this  
menu to set Parental Lock.  
: Picture menu (PICTURE) (A pg. 47)  
You can select the desired options concerning a picture or monitor  
screen.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting DVD preferences  
4 Press ENTER.  
Basic operation on the choice menus  
The pop-up window, listing the selectable options, appears on  
the choice menu.  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
1 Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO.  
2 Press DVD.  
Cursor  
(3/2///5)  
/ENTER  
5 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
the desired option.  
Example:When “FILM” is selected.  
1 Press CHOICE.  
The language menu (LANGUAGE) appears on the TV screen.  
6 Press ENTER.  
Your choice is stored.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 repeatedly to display  
one of the choice menus.  
Each time you press the button, the choice menus change as  
follows;  
LANGUAGE O  
SPK. SETTING O OTHERS O (back to the  
beginning)  
PICTURE O  
AUDIO O  
To set other items on the same choice menu  
Repeat steps 3 to 6.  
Example:When the picture menu (PICTURE) is selected.  
To move to another choice menu  
Press Cursor 3/2 repeatedly to select a choice menu you want to  
set up.  
To return to the normal screen  
Press CHOICE.  
NOTE  
• Some items in the choice menus consist of sub-menus to set up.  
Selecting these items and pressing ENTER makes its related sub-  
menu appear on the TV screen. You can set submenus using Cursor  
/
3 2 / 5  
/
/
and ENTER (as explained in this basic operation).  
3 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to move  
H to the item you want to set up.  
Example:When “PICTURE SOURCE” is selected.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting DVD preferences  
7 SUBTITLE  
Some DVDs have multiple subtitle languages.  
• Select the initial subtitle language*.  
Menu description  
OFF (no indication of subtitles), ENGLISH, SPANISH,  
FRENCH, CHINESE, GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE and  
language codes from AA to ZU (see below)  
: Language menu (LANGUAGE)  
NOTE  
7 ON SCREEN LANGUAGE  
• Select the language shown on the TV screen when operating this  
system.  
• You can select “MENU LANGUAGE”, “AUDIO LANGUAGE” and  
“SUBTITLE” only while playback is stopped.  
ENGLISH, SPANISH and FRENCH  
7 MENU LANGUAGE  
Some DVDs have their own menus in multiple languages.  
• Select the initial language*.  
* When the language you have selected is not recorded to a disc,  
the original language is automatically used as the initial  
language.  
ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE, GERMAN,  
ITALIAN, JAPANESE and language codes from AA to ZU  
(see below)  
7 AUDIO LANGUAGE  
Some DVDs have multiple audio languages.  
• Select the initial audio language*.  
ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE, GERMAN,  
ITALIAN, JAPANESE and language codes from AA to ZU  
(see below)  
The language codes list  
AA Afar  
GL Galician  
GN Guarani  
GU Gujarati  
HA Hausa  
ML Malayalam  
MN Mongolian  
MO Moldavian  
MR Marathi  
SO Somali  
SQ Albanian  
SR Serbian  
SS Siswati  
ST Sesotho  
SU Sundanese  
SV Swedish  
SW Swahili  
TA Tamil  
AB Abkhazian  
AF Afrikaans  
AM Ameharic  
AR Arabic  
HI Hindi  
MS Malay (MAY)  
MT Maltese  
AS Assamese  
AY Aymara  
AZ Azerbaijani  
BA Bashkir  
BE Byelorussian  
BG Bulgarian  
BH Bihari  
HR Croatian  
HU Hungarian  
HY Armenian  
IA Interlingua  
IE Interlingue  
IK Inupiak  
IN Indonesian  
IS Icelandic  
IW Hebrew  
MY Burmese  
NA Nauru  
NE Nepali  
NL Dutch  
TE Telugu  
TG Tajik  
NO Norwegian  
OC Occitan  
TH Thai  
BI Bislama  
BN Bengali, Bangla  
BO Tibetan  
BR Breton  
OM (Afan) Oromo  
OR Oriya  
TI Tigrinya  
TK Turkmen  
TL Tagalog  
TN Setswana  
TO Tonga  
TR Turkish  
TS Tsonga  
TT Tatar  
JI  
Yiddish  
PA Panjabi  
JW Javanese  
KA Georgian  
KK Kazakh  
PL Polish  
CA Catalan  
CO Corsican  
CS Czech  
PS Pashto, Pushto  
PT Portuguese  
QU Quechua  
RM Rhaeto-Romance  
RN Kirundi  
KL Greenlandic  
KM Cambodian  
KN Kannada  
KO Korean (KOR)  
KS Kashmiri  
KU Kurdish  
CY Welsh  
DA Danish  
DZ Bhutani  
EL Greek  
TW Twi  
RO Rumanian  
RU Russian  
UK Ukrainian  
UR Urdu  
EO Esperanto  
ET Estonian  
EU Basque  
FA Persian  
FI Finnish  
FJ Fiji  
RW Kinyarwanda  
SA Sanskrit  
SD Sindhi  
UZ Uzbek  
VI Vietnamese  
VO Volapuk  
WO Wolof  
XH Xhosa  
YO Yoruba  
ZU Zulu  
KY Kirghiz  
LA Latin  
LN Lingala  
SG Sangho  
LO Laothian  
LT Lithuanian  
LV Latvian, Lettish  
MG Malagasy  
MI Maori  
SH Serbo-Croatian  
SI Singhalese  
SK Slovak  
FO Faroese  
FY Frisian  
SL Slovenian  
SM Samoan  
GA Irish  
GD Scots Gaelic  
MK Macedonian  
SN Shona  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Setting DVD preferences  
: Picture menu (PICTURE)  
7 MONITOR TYPE  
: Audio menu (AUDIO)  
7 L/R BALANCE  
You can select the monitor type to match your TV when you play  
DVDs recorded in the picture’s height/width ratio of 16:9.  
• 16:9 NORMAL (Wide television conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is fixed to 16:9  
(wide TV).  
You can adjust the balance between the front left and front right  
speakers.  
L-21 to L-1 O CENTER O R-1 to R-21 (by 1 step)  
• CENTER  
The levels of the front left and right speakers are identical.  
• L-21 to L-1 and R-1 to R-21  
As the number increases, the level from one speaker lowered  
than that of the other speaker. (When you select “-21”, no  
sound comes out from the selected (L or R) speaker.)  
The system automatically adjusts the screen width of the  
output signal correctly when playing back a picture whose  
aspect ratio is 4:3.  
• 16:9 AUTO (Wide television conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide  
TV).  
7 BASS  
You can adjust the enhancement level for bass sound from the front  
speakers.  
• 4:3 LB (Letter Box conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3  
(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the  
black bars appear on the top and the bottom of the screen.  
• 4:3 PS (Pan Scan conversion)  
Within the range from –10 to +10. (by 2 step)  
7 TREBLE  
You can adjust the enhancement level for treble sound from the  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3  
(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the  
black bars do not appear, however, the left and right edges of  
the pictures will not be shown on the screen.  
front speakers.  
Within the range from –10 to +10. (by 2 step)  
NOTE  
• You can adjust bass/treble enhancement level only for front left/right  
channel. However, the supplied speakers cannot add the effective  
change to the bass sound because of their cutoff frequency even if the  
bass sound adjustment is made. (A pg. 48)  
To change the bass enhancement level more efficiently, adjust the  
output level of the subwoofer. (A pg. 19)  
Ex.: 16:9  
Ex.: 4:3 LB  
Ex.: 4:3 PS  
(When you change the front speakers to the larger ones and select  
“LARGE” for the front speakers in the SIZE sub-menu (A pg. 48),  
the effective adjustment of bass sound is also possible.)  
NOTE  
• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become “4:3 LB”  
with some DVDs. This depends on how DVDs are recorded.  
• When you select “16:9 NORMAL” for a picture whose aspect ratio is  
4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the process for converting the  
picture width.  
7 LFE ATT.  
The Low Frequency Effect attenuater diminishes distortion of the  
bass sound from the subwoofer when playing back a disc with  
7 PICTURE SOURCE  
Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround.  
• ON  
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting whether the  
content on the disc is processed by field (video source) or by frame  
(film source).  
Select this to diminish distortion of the bass sound from the  
subwoofer.  
• OFF  
Normally set to AUTO”.  
Select this to deactivate the function.  
• VIDEO (NORMAL)  
Suitable for playing back a video source disc with relatively a  
few movements.  
• VIDEO (ACTIVE)  
Suitable for playing back a video source disc with relatively a  
lot of movements.  
• FILM  
7 D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
(Dynamic range compression)  
You can enjoy low level recorded sound clearly at night even at a  
low volume when listening to the sound with Dolby Digital.  
• MAX  
Select this when you want to fully apply the compression  
effect (useful at midnight).  
• MID  
Select this when you want to reduce the dynamic range a  
little.  
• OFF  
Suitable for playing back a film source disc.  
• AUTO  
Used to play a disc containing both video and film source  
materials.  
This system recognizes the source type (video or film) of the  
current disc according to the disc information.  
• If the playback picture is unclear or noisy, or the oblique  
lines of the picture are rough, try to change to other modes.  
Select this when you want to enjoy surround sound with its  
full dynamic range (no effect applied).  
7 SCREEN SAVER  
You can activate or deactivate the screen saver function. (A pg. 22)  
: Speaker setting menu  
(SPK. SETTING)  
• ON  
The picture on the TV screen becomes dark.  
• OFF  
Select this to deactivate the function.  
7 SIZE  
Accesses the SIZE sub-menu (speaker size setting  
menu). (See following.)  
7 LEVEL  
7 MP3/JPEG  
Accesses the LEVEL sub-menu (speaker level setting  
menu). (See following.)  
If both MP3 files and JPEG files are recorded on a disc, you can  
select which files to play.  
• MP3  
7 DISTANCE  
Accesses the DISTANCE sub-menu (speaker distance  
setting menu). (See following.)  
Select this to play MP3 files.  
• JPEG  
Select this to play JPEG files.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                             
Setting DVD preferences  
7 CROSS OVER*  
7 Level menu (LEVEL)  
Small speakers cannot reproduce bass sounds efficiently. If you use  
a small speaker in any position, this system automatically  
reallocates the bass sound elements assigned to the small speaker to  
one of the large speakers.  
To use this function properly, set crossover frequency level  
according to the size of the smallest speaker connected.  
• 200 Hz  
CENTER SPEAKER*/SURROUND LEFT SPEAKER*/  
Adjust the output level of related speakers.  
Within the range from –10 dB to +10 dB.  
TEST TONE**  
Outputs the test tone.  
Select this when the cone speaker unit in the smallest speaker  
connected is about 4 cm in diameter.  
• 150 Hz (Select this when using the supplied speakers.)  
Select this when the cone speaker unit in the smallest speaker  
connected is about 6 cm in diameter.  
RETURN  
Returns to the SPK. SETTING menu.  
* • You cannot select “CENTER SPEAKER” when one of the  
DAP modes (A pg. 27) is selected as the surround mode.  
(A pg. 29)  
• 120 Hz  
You cannot select “CENTER SPEAKER”, “SURROUND  
LEFT SPEAKER” and “SURROUND RIGHT SPEAKER”  
when the surround mode is off (stereo). (A pg. 29)  
** The test tone comes out of all of the activated speakers in the  
following sequence:  
Select this when the cone speaker unit in the smallest speaker  
connected is about 8 cm in diameter.  
• 100 Hz  
Select this when the cone speaker unit in the smallest speaker  
connected is about 10 cm in diameter.  
• 80 Hz  
] Front left speaker ] Center speaker ] Front right  
speaker ] Surround right speaker ] Surround left  
speaker ] (back to the beginning)  
Select this when the cone speaker unit in the smallest speaker  
connected is about 12 cm in diameter.  
* If you have selected “LARGE” for all speakers in the SIZE  
menu, this function will not take effect.  
7 Distance menu (DISTANCE)  
Example:  
7 RETURN TO INITIAL  
Center  
speaker  
Resets all speaker settings to the initial settings.  
Subwoofer  
7 Size menu (SIZE)  
Front right  
CAUTION  
Front left  
3.0 m  
• When using the supplied speakers, select “SMALL” for each.  
Selecting “LARGE” may damage the speakers.  
2.7 m  
2.4 m  
NOTE  
2.1 m  
• When “SMALL” is selected for the front speakers, you cannot select  
“LARGE” for the center speaker and surround speakers.  
FRONT SPEAKER/CENTER SPEAKER/SURROUND  
SPEAKER  
Surround left  
Surround right  
Select the speaker size according to the actual size of your  
speakers.  
In this case, set the distance of each speaker as follows;  
• LARGE  
• Distance of front speakers:  
• Distance of center speaker:  
3.0 m  
2.7 m  
Select this when the cone speaker unit in the speaker is larger  
than 12 cm in diameter.  
• SMALL (Select this when using the supplied speakers.)  
Select this when the cone speaker unit in the speaker is  
smaller than 12 cm in diameter.  
• Distance of surround speakers: 2.4 m  
FRONT SPEAKER/CENTER SPEAKER/SURROUND  
SPEAKER  
Adjust the distance from the listening position to the speakers.  
Within the range from 0.3 m to 9.0 m (by 0.3 m)  
SUB WOOFER  
USE  
This item is fixed to “USE”.  
TEST TONE*  
RETURN  
Outputs the test tone.  
Returns to the SPK. SETTING menu.  
RETURN  
Returns to the SPK. SETTING menu.  
* The test tone comes out of all of the activated speakers in the  
following sequence:  
] Front left speaker ] Center speaker ] Front right  
speaker ] Surround right speaker ] Surround left  
speaker ] (back to the beginning)  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Setting DVD preferences  
: Other setting menu (OTHERS)  
Parental Lock  
Using this function, you can restrict playback of a DVD containing  
violent scenes or scenes not suitable for your other family  
members. Nobody can play such a disc unless this function is  
canceled.  
• This setting takes effect only for DVDs containing the Parental  
Lock level information — Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8  
(least restrictive).  
NOTE  
• You can select “PARENTAL LOCK” only while playback is  
stopped.  
7 RESUME  
You can activate or deactivate Resume Playback function.  
• ON  
Select this to activate the function.  
You can set the Parental Lock only when playback is stopped.  
• OFF  
Select this to deactivate the function.  
Cursor  
(3/2///5)  
/ENTER  
7 ON SCREEN GUIDE  
You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons.  
(A pg. 22)  
• ON  
Select this to activate the function.  
• OFF  
Number buttons  
Select this to deactivate the function.  
7 AUTO STANDBY*  
When playback ends and does not restart for more than the time  
you specify, this system turns off by itself.  
Setting Parental Lock  
• 60  
This system turns off by itself if playback does not restart  
within 60 minutes.  
1 Press CHOICE.  
• 30  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to display the  
This system turns off by itself if playback does not restart  
within 30 minutes.  
OTHERS menu.  
• OFF  
3 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to move  
Select this to deactivate the function.  
H to “PARENTAL LOCK”, then press  
* When both the Auto Standby function and the Sleep Timer are  
activated, if the shut-off time set by the Sleep Timer comes  
earlier than the one set by the Auto Standby function, the Sleep  
Timer controls shut-off time.  
ENTER.  
The PARENTAL LOCK sub-menu appears on the TV screen.  
7 PARENTAL LOCK  
You can restrict playback of a DVD containing violent scenes that  
is not suitable for your other family members.  
Accesses the PARENTAL LOCK sub-menu. (See  
following “Parental Lock”.)  
4 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to move  
H to “COUNTRY CODE”, then press  
ENTER.  
5 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
the country code, then press ENTER.  
See “Country/Area codes list for Parental Lock” (A pg. 51).  
The H moves to “SET LEVEL”.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Setting DVD preferences  
6 Press ENTER.  
4 Press number buttons (0-9) to enter  
your password, then press ENTER.  
• If you enter a wrong password, “WRONG! RETRY...”  
appears under the PARENTAL LOCK sub-menu. You  
cannot go to the next steps before you enter the correct  
password.  
5 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to move  
H to the item you want to change, then  
press ENTER.  
7 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
the level of restriction, then press  
ENTER.  
6 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to change  
the setting, then press ENTER.  
7 Press number buttons (0-9) to enter  
The H moves to “PASSWORD”.  
your password, then press ENTER.  
• Select “NONE” to cancel this function.  
The new setting is stored.  
NOTE  
• You cannot set the Parental Lock before you set your password.  
• If you go out of the PARENTAL LOCK sub-menu before setting your  
password in step 6, the new country code and parental lock level will  
not become effective. The old country code and parental level will  
remain in effect.  
• When you enter wrong passwords more than three times, the  
H
moves to “EXIT” automatically and Cursor  
/
do not work. Press  
/ 5  
ENTER to exit from the PARENTAL LOCK sub-menu, then repeat  
from step 1.  
• If you forget your password, enter “8888”.  
8 Press number buttons (0-9) to enter a  
four-digit number as your password,  
then press ENTER.  
9 TPhreeHssmoEveNs TtoEERX.IT”.  
Releasing Parental Lock temporarily  
When you set a strict parental level, some discs may not be played  
back at all. When you load such a disc and try to play it, the  
following display appears on the TV screen. You can temporarily  
release the Parental Lock.  
The OTHERS menu resumes.  
To return to the normal screen  
Press CHOICE.  
NOTE  
• Remember your password, or make a note of it.  
Changing the Parental Lock setting  
1 Press CHOICE.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to display the  
OTHERS menu.  
1 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to move  
H to “TEMPORARY RELEASE”, then  
press ENTER.  
3 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to move  
H to “PARENTAL LOCK”, then press  
ENTER.  
The H moves to “PASSWORD”.  
• When selecting “NOT RELEASE”, press one of 0 buttons  
on the center unit to remove the disc.  
The PARENTAL LOCK sub-menu appears on the TV screen.  
You can only move H to “PASSWORD” or to “EXIT”  
before you enter your password.  
2 Press number buttons (0-9) to enter  
your password.  
Playback starts.  
• If you enter a wrong password, “WRONG! RETRY...”  
appears under the PARENTAL LOCK sub-menu. You  
cannot play the disc before you enter the correct password.  
NOTE  
• When you enter wrong passwords more than three times, the  
H
moves to “NOT RELEASE” automatically and Cursor  
/
do not  
/ 5  
work. Press one of buttons on the center unit to remove the disc.  
0
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting DVD preferences  
Country/Area codes list for Parental Lock  
AD Andorra  
ER Eritrea  
ES Spain  
RW Rwanda  
Lao People’s Democratic  
Republic  
LA  
AE United Arab Emirates  
AF Afghanistan  
SA Saudi Arabia  
SB Solomon Islands  
SC Seychelles  
SD Sudan  
ET Ethiopia  
LB Lebanon  
AG Antigua and Barbuda  
FI  
FJ  
Finland  
Fiji  
LC Saint Lucia  
AI  
Anguilla  
LI  
Liechtenstein  
AL Albania  
FK Falkland Islands (Malvinas)  
LK Sri Lanka  
LR Liberia  
SE Sweden  
AM Armenia  
SG Singapore  
SH Saint Helena  
Micronesia (Fedelated States  
FM  
of)  
AN Netherlands Antilles  
AO Angola  
LS Lesotho  
FO Faroe Islands  
FR France  
LT Lithuania  
LU Luxembourg  
LV Latvia  
SI  
SJ  
Slovenia  
AQ Antarctica  
AR Argentina  
AS American Samoa  
AT Austria  
Svalbard and Jan Mayen  
FX France, Metropolitan  
GA Gabon  
SK Slovakia  
LY Libyan Arab Jamahiriya  
MA Morocco  
SL Sierra Leone  
SM San Marino  
SN Senegal  
GB United Kingdom  
GD Grenada  
AU Australia  
MC Monaco  
AW Aruba  
GE Georgia  
MD Moldova, Republic of  
MG Madagascar  
MH Marshall Islands  
ML Mali  
SO Somalia  
AZ Azerbaijan  
BA Bosnia and Herzegovina  
BB Barbados  
GF French Guiana  
GH Ghana  
SR Suriname  
ST Sao Tome and Principe  
SV El Salvador  
SY Syrian Arab Republic  
SZ Swaziland  
GI  
Gibraltar  
BD Bangladesh  
BE Belgium  
GL Greenland  
GM Gambia  
MM Myanmar  
MN Mongolia  
MO Macau  
BF Burkina Faso  
BG Bulgaria  
GN Guinea  
TC Turks and Caicos Islands  
TD Chad  
GP Guadeloupe  
GQ Equatorial Guinea  
GR Greece  
MP Northern Mariana Islands  
MQ Martinique  
MR Mauritania  
MS Montserrat  
MT Malta  
BH Bahrain  
TF French Southern Territories  
TG Togo  
BI  
BJ  
Burundi  
Benin  
TH Thailand  
South Georgia and the South  
Sandwich Islands  
GS  
BM Bermuda  
TJ  
Tajikistan  
BN Brunei Darussalam  
BO Bolivia  
GT Guatemala  
GU Guam  
MU Mauritius  
MV Maldives  
TK Tokelau  
TM Turkmenistan  
TN Tunisia  
BR Brazil  
GW Guinea-Bissau  
GY Guyana  
MW Malawi  
BS Bahamas  
MX Mexico  
TO Tonga  
BT Bhutan  
HK Hong Kong  
MY Malaysia  
TP East Timor  
TR Turkey  
BV Bouvet Island  
BW Botswana  
BY Belarus  
MZ Mozambique  
NA Namibia  
Heard Island and McDonald  
Islands  
HM  
TT Trinidad and Tobago  
TV Tuvalu  
HN Honduras  
HR Croatia  
HT Haiti  
NC New Caledonia  
NE Niger  
BZ Belize  
TW Taiwan  
CA Canada  
NF Norfolk Island  
NG Nigeria  
TZ Tanzania, United Republic of  
UA Ukraine  
CC Cocos (Keeling) Islands  
CF Central African Republic  
CG Congo  
HU Hungary  
ID  
IE  
IL  
IN  
IO  
IQ  
IR  
IS  
Indonesia  
Ireland  
Israel  
NI  
Nicaragua  
UG Uganda  
NL Netherlands  
NO Norway  
NP Nepal  
United States Minor Outlying  
Islands  
UM  
CH Switzerland  
CI  
Côte d’Ivoire  
India  
US United States  
CK Cook Islands  
CL Chile  
British Indian Ocean Territory NR Nauru  
UY Uruguay  
Iraq  
NU Niue  
UZ Uzbekistan  
CM Cameroon  
CN China  
Iran (Islamic Republic of)  
NZ New Zealand  
OM Oman  
VA Vatican City State (Holy See)  
Iceland  
Italy  
Saint Vincent and the  
Grenadines  
VC  
CO Colombia  
CR Costa Rica  
CU Cuba  
IT  
PA Panama  
JM Jamaica  
PE Peru  
VE Venezuela  
JO  
JP  
Jordan  
Japan  
PF French Polynesia  
PG Papua New Guinea  
PH Philippines  
PK Pakistan  
VG Virgin Islands (British)  
CV Cape Verde  
CX Christmas Island  
CY Cyprus  
VI  
Virgin Islands (U.S.)  
KE Kenya  
VN Vietnam  
KG Kyrgyzstan  
KH Cambodia  
VU Vanuatu  
CZ Czech Republic  
DE Germany  
DJ Djibouti  
PL Poland  
WF Wallis and Futuna Islands  
WS Samoa  
KI  
Kiribati  
PM Saint Pierre and Miquelon  
PN Pitcairn  
KM Comoros  
YE Yemen  
DK Denmark  
DM Dominica  
DO Dominican Republic  
DZ Algeria  
KN Saint Kitts and Nevis  
PR Puerto Rico  
PT Portugal  
YT Mayotte  
YU Yugoslavia  
ZA South Africa  
ZM Zambia  
Korea, Democratic People’s  
Republic of  
KP  
PW Palau  
KR Korea, Republic of  
KW Kuwait  
PY Paraguay  
QA Qatar  
EC Ecuador  
ZR Zaire  
EE Estonia  
KY Cayman Islands  
KZ Kazakhstan  
RE Réunion  
ZW Zimbabwe  
EG Egypt  
RO Romania  
EH Western Sahara  
RU Russian Federation  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System setting  
You can adjust the sound and speaker settings of this system.  
• The adjustments on a source take effect for the other sources.  
• BAL:  
You can adjust the balance between the front left and front  
right speakers. (A pg. 47)  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO.  
• D. COMP (Dynamic Range Compression):  
You can enjoy low level recorded sound clearly at night even  
at a low volume level when listening to the sound with  
Dolby Digital. (A pg. 47)  
• AUDIO POS (Audio Position):  
Set the audio position of subwoofer so that the subwoofer  
level can be automatically adjusted properly. (The smaller  
the number becomes, the more the level decreases  
automatically when listening in stereo.)  
Cursor  
(3/2///5)  
• M. OUT (Monitor Out):  
Select the video output jack type by which you watch DVD  
playback after connecting your TV. (A pg. 8)  
Set the video output to use AV COMPU LINK remote  
control system. (A pg. 53)  
VIDEO: To watch DVD playback via the VIDEO jack.  
S:  
COMPNT (component):  
To watch DVD playback via the COMPONENT  
To watch DVD playback via the S-VIDEO jack.  
NOTE  
Before you start operation;  
• There is a time limit when doing the following steps. If the setting is  
cancelled before you finish, start from step 1 again.  
• When selecting DVD as the source, the settings of the corresponding  
items in the choice menus also change.  
VIDEO OUT jacks.  
3 Press Cursor 3/2 to make an  
adjustment or selection.  
Example:  
On the remote control:  
1 Press SETTING.  
The item you last selected appears on the display window.  
Example:BAL” has been selected.  
• FRNT SP, CNTR SP, SURR SP:  
“SML(small) O “LRG” (large)  
• FRNT D, CNTR D, SURR D:  
Within the range between 1 ft (0.3 m) and 30 ft (9.0 m)  
(by 1 ft (0.3 m) step)  
2 Press Cursor //5 repeatedly to select  
• CROSS:  
the item you want to set.  
“80Hz” O “100Hz” O “120Hz” O “150Hz” O “200Hz”  
O (back to the beginning)  
Each time you press the button, the items shown on the display  
window change as follows:  
• LFE ATT.:  
O FRNT SP O CNTR SP O SURR SP O FRNT D O  
CNTR D O SURR D O CROSS O LFE ATT. O BAL O  
D. COMP O AUDIO POS O M. OUT O (back to the  
beginning)  
“ON” O “OFF”  
• BAL:  
“L-21” to “L-1” O “CENTER” O R-1” to “R-21”  
• D. COMP:  
See the corresponding pages for details on the related  
adjustments except for “AUDIO POS” and “M. OUT”.  
“MID” O “MAX” O “OFF” O (back to the beginning)  
• AUDIO POS:  
“0” O “–2” O “–4” O“–6” O (back to the beginning)  
CNTR SP (center speaker),  
• M. OUT:  
SURR SP (surround speakers):  
“VIDEO” O “S” O “COMPNT” O (back to the  
beginning)  
Select the size of each speaker. (A pg. 48)  
• FRNT D (front speakers distance),  
CNTR D (center speaker distance),  
SURR D (surround speakers distance):  
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other items.  
NOTE  
Adjust distance from the listening position to the speakers.  
• If you selected “SML” for the front speakers, you cannot select  
“LRG” for the center and surround speakers.  
• You can confirm your adjustment of speaker settings by listening to  
the test tone. To output the test tone, press TEST. (A pg. 30)  
(A pg. 48)  
• CROSS:  
Select the cutoff frequency of the subwoofer. (A pg. 48)  
• LFE ATT.:  
Diminish the distortion of the bass sound from the  
subwoofer while playing back a disc with Dolby Digital or  
DTS Digital Surround. (A pg. 47)  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
AV COMPU LINK remote control system  
The AV COMPU LINK remote  
control system allows you to operate  
NOTE  
• To correctly use the automatic selection of TV input mode, select the  
correct “M. OUT” setting. (A pg. 52)  
JVC TVs and VCRs through the center unit. This system is  
equipped with the AV COMPU LINK-III, which adds a function to  
operate JVC’s video components via the video components  
terminals. To use this remote control system, you need to connect  
the video components you want to operate as follows.  
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your TV and video  
components.  
Available functions  
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to use  
the functions listed following.  
One-touch video play  
Simply by inserting a video cassette without its safety tab into the  
VCR, you can enjoy video playback without manually setting other  
switches. This system automatically turns on and changes the  
source to VCR.  
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the  
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.  
When you insert a video cassette with its safety tab in place, press  
the play (3) button on the VCR or on the remote control to get the  
same result.  
Connecting a TV and VCR  
CAUTION  
Before connecting;  
• If you have already plugged your VCR, TV and the center unit into  
the AC outlets, unplug their AC power cords first.  
1 Connect the center unit to a TV and  
VCR.  
One-touch DVD play  
2 CFoonr dneetacilst, tsheeepacgee 8natnedr1u2.nit to a TV and VCR  
using the optional AV COMPU LINK  
cords.  
Simply by starting playback on the built-in DVD player, you can  
enjoy playback without manually setting other switches. The TV  
automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the  
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.  
Automatic selection of TV input mode  
When you select DVD or VCR as the source to play on the system,  
the TV automatically changes the input mode to the appropriate  
position so that you can view the playback picture.  
Automatic Power On/Off  
The TV and VCR turn on and off along with the system.  
When you turn on the system;  
• If the previously selected source is “DVD”, only the TV will turn  
on automatically.  
• If the previously selected source is “VCR”, the TV and VCR will  
turn on automatically.  
When you turn off the system, the TV and VCR will turn off.  
NOTE  
• If you turn off the system while recording on the VCR, the VCR will  
not turn off and will continue recording.  
AV COMPU LINK cord  
(not supplied)  
TV  
VCR  
3 Plug the AC power cords of the VCR, TV  
and the center unit into the AC outlets.  
4 Turn on the connected components  
first, then turn on the center unit.  
• When turning on the TV for the first time after the AV  
COMPU LINK connection, turn the TV volume to  
minimum using the TV volume control on the TV.  
• When turning on the VCR, use the remote control supplied  
with this system. (Press F VCR/DBS.)  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
References  
To clean the disc  
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
• DO NOT use any solvent — such as  
conventional record cleaner, spray,  
thinner or benzine — to clean the disc.  
Maintenance  
To get the best performance out of this system, keep your discs and  
mechanism clean.  
7 General Notes  
7 Cleaning the system  
In general, you will have the best performance by keeping your  
discs and the mechanism clean.  
• Stains on the system should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the  
system is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-  
diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a  
dry cloth.  
• Store discs in their cases and keep them in cabinets or on shelves.  
7 Handling Discs  
• Since the system may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or  
get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following.  
• Remove the disc from its case by holding it at  
the edge while pressing the center hole lightly.  
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc or  
bend the disc.  
DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.  
DO NOT wipe it strong.  
DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.  
DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it.  
DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact with  
it for a long time.  
• Put the disc back in its case after use to  
prevent warping.  
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the  
disc when placing it back in its case.  
Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature  
extremes and moisture.  
Trouble shooting  
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If there is any problem you cannot solve, contact your JVC service center.  
General  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
Power does not come  
on.  
The power cord is not connected to the center unit or an Connect the power cord correctly. (A pg. 13)  
AC outlet.  
Power is not supplied to The power cord of the subwoofer is not connected to an Turn off the system, plug the power cord firmly into an  
the powered subwoofer. AC outlet.  
AC outlet, and turn on the system again. (A pg. 13, 17)  
The system cord is not connected.  
Connect the system cord. (A pg. 10)  
The system does not  
work correctly.  
Lightning or electronic noise interferes with operation Switch the power off, then disconnect/reconnect the  
of the microcomputer.  
power plug.  
Immediately after beginning to heat the room, the  
system was moved to a cold location causing  
condensation to form inside.  
Switch the power off and leave the system a few hours  
before switching the power on again.  
The remote control does It is too far from the center unit, or is not facing the  
Move closer to the center unit. (Operate the remote  
not work.  
center unit.  
control within 7 m of the center unit.) (A pg. 14)  
There is something obstructing the remote sensor.  
Remove any obstacles. (A pg. 14)  
The remote control is not aimed at the remote sensor on Aim the remote control at the remote sensor on the  
the center unit or components. equipment you want to operate. (A pg. 14)  
The remote control mode selector is set at an incorrect Set the selector to the correct position. (A pg. 17)  
position.  
The batteries are exhausted.  
Replace the batteries. (A pg. 14)  
The batteries have been inserted the wrong way round Insert the batteries correctly. (A pg. 14)  
(+/–).  
The remote control is not set to operate the DVD player For the DVD player, press DVD before you perform the  
or tuner (FM/AM).  
operations. (A pg. 21)  
For the tuner, press FM/AM before you perform the  
operations. (A pg. 25)  
Sunlight is falling directly on the remote sensor.  
The remote control signals are not set correctly.  
Hide the remote sensor from direct sunlight.  
Enter the correct manufacturer’s code. (A pg. 15, 16)  
Continued on next page  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
References  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
The system cord and/or speaker cord is not connected. Check the connection. (A pg. 10 – 11)  
There is a short in the speaker cord. Reconnect the speaker cord.  
SOLUTION  
No sound.  
The audio cord is not connected to AUDIO IN (VCR) Connect the cord correctly. (A pg. 12)  
and/or DIGITAL IN (DBS) correctly.  
An incorrect source has been selected.  
Muting is on.  
Select the correct source. (A pg. 18)  
Press MUTING to cancel muting. (A pg. 18)  
Select the proper decode mode. (A pg. 20)  
Connect the speaker cord correctly. (A pg. 10)  
The decode mode is not set correctly.  
The speaker cord is not connected correctly.  
Sound from one front  
speaker only.  
Left-right balance is not set properly.  
The speaker setting is incorrect.  
Adjust the balance properly. (A pg. 47, 52)  
Set the speaker setting properly. (A pg. 47, 52)  
No sound from the  
center and/or surround  
speakers.  
Bass sound is heard  
reinforced when  
Appropriate bass level for stereo sound is not selected. Set “AUDIO POS” properly. (A pg. 52)  
listening in stereo.  
DVD Playback  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
No picture is displayed The video cord is not connected correctly.  
on the TV screen.  
Connect the cord correctly. (A pg. 8)  
TV input selection is incorrect.  
The disc is not playable.  
Select the correct input on the TV.  
Use a playable disc. (A pg. 3)  
No picture is displayed The scan mode is set to “PROGRESSIVE” though the Change the scan mode to “INTERLACE”. (A pg. 20)  
on the TV screen, the center unit is connected to the TV which does not  
picture is blurred, or the support the progressive video input such as a  
picture is divided into  
two parts.  
conventional TV.  
A disc cannot be played. The center unit’s and disc’s Region Code numbers are Replace the disc. (A pg. 3)  
incompatible.  
Parental Lock is in use.  
Enter password to change the Parental Lock level.  
(A pg. 49)  
A disc cannot be played The disc is loaded with its label and data sides inverted. Load the disc correctly. (A pg. 21)  
and “0:00” is displayed  
on the display window.  
The unplayable disc is loaded.  
The disc is scratched or dirty.  
Replace the disc. (A pg. 3)  
Video and audio are  
distorted.  
Replace or clean the disc. (A pg. 2)  
A VCR is connected between the center unit and the  
TV.  
Connect the center unit and TV directly. (A pg. 8)  
With some discs, a picture may be blurred when setting Set “PICTURE SOURCE” to “VIDEO (NORMAL)” or  
“PICTURE SOURCE” to “FILM” or “AUTO”.  
“VIDEO (ACTIVE)”. (A pg. 47)  
The picture does not fit The monitor type is not set correctly.  
the TV screen.  
Set “MONITOR TYPE” properly. (A pg. 47)  
The TV is not set correctly.  
Set the TV properly.  
No subtitle appears on  
the TV screen though  
you have selected a  
certain language as your  
initial subtitle language.  
Some DVDs are programmed to always display no  
subtitle initially. If this happens, press SUBTITLE on  
the remote control after starting play. (A pg. 37)  
Audio language is  
different from the one  
you have selected as  
your initial audio  
language.  
Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original  
language initially. If this happens, press AUDIO on the  
remote control after starting play. (A pg. 37)  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
MP3 Playback  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
A disc cannot be played. No MP3 files are recorded to the disc.  
MP3 files do not have the file extension in their file  
names.  
Replace the disc.  
Add correct file extension (.mp3, .Mp3, .mP3 or .MP3)  
to their file names. (A pg. 3)  
MP3 files are not recorded in a format compliant with Replace the disc. (Record MP3 files using a compliant  
ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2.  
application.)  
The different types of files are recorded to the disc.  
The disc which contains the different types of files may  
not be played because of its disc characteristics or  
recording conditions.  
Not MP3 files but JPEG The MP3/JPEG setting is set to “JPEG”.  
files are played.  
When both MP3 files and JPEG files are recorded to a  
disc, set “MP3/JPEG” to “MP3” to play MP3 files.  
(A pg. 47)  
The MP3 control display No MP3 files or JPEG files are recorded to the disc, or Replace the disc. (A pg. 3)  
appears on the TV  
screen, but no operation  
can be performed.  
the disc is an unplayable disc (such as CD-ROM).  
JPEG Playback  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
A disc cannot be played. No JPEG files are recorded to the disc.  
Replace the disc.  
JPEG files do not have the correct file extension in their Add correct file extension (.jpg, .jpeg, .JPG, .JPEG or  
file names.  
any uppercase and lowercase combination such as  
“.Jpg”) to their file names. (A pg. 3)  
JPEG files are not recorded in a format compliant with Replace the disc. (Record JPEG files using a compliant  
ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2.  
application.)  
Not JPEG files but MP3 The MP3/JPEG setting is set to “MP3”.  
files are played.  
When both MP3 files and JPEG files are recorded to a  
disc, set “MP3/JPEG” to “JPEG” to play JPEG files.  
(A pg. 47)  
FM/AM  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
Antennas are disconnected.  
SOLUTION  
Hard to listen to  
broadcast because of  
noise.  
Reconnect the antennas correctly and securely.  
The AM loop antenna is too close to the center unit.  
Change the position and direction of the AM loop  
antenna.  
The supplied FM antenna is not properly extended and Extend the FM antenna to the best position.  
positioned.  
Beat Cut mode is not set properly while listening to an Try to change the Beat Cut mode. (A pg. 26)  
AM broadcast.  
Continuous static during The received signal is too weak.  
FM broadcasts.  
Connect an external FM antenna (A pg. 9), or contact  
your dealer.  
The station is too far away.  
Select another station.  
Others  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
One-touch DVD play  
does not work though  
you have connected AV  
COMPU LINK cord  
correctly.  
The video output jack type to watch the DVD playback Set “M. OUT” properly to watch the DVD playback.  
is not set correctly.  
(A pg. 52)  
The system suddenly  
turns off by itself.  
The Sleep Timer or Auto Standby function is activated. Turn the functions off. (A pg. 19, 49)  
NOTE  
• Problems may be caused by components connected to the center unit, so also read all manuals for the connected components carefully.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
Multiangle  
By recording multiple scenes progressing at the same time in a  
single title, the user can select view angles. This feature is called  
the multiangle function.  
Glossary  
Aspect ratio  
The ratio of vertical and horizontal sizes of a displayed image. The  
horizontal vs. vertical ratio of conventional TVs is 4:3, and that of  
wide-screens is 16:9.  
Multichannel  
DVD is specified to have each sound track constitute one sound  
field. Multichannel refers to a structure of sound tracks having three  
or more channels.  
Chapter  
Refers to individual chapters included in a title.  
Multilanguage  
When a title is created to cope with multiple languages, it is  
generally called a multilanguage title.  
Composite video signal  
Refers to video signal comprised of three kinds of signals  
combined: an image signal made up of luminance and chrominance  
signals using the frequency multiplication technique; burst signal  
providing the basis for color reproduction; and synchronization  
signal.  
Parental Lock  
A feature of this system to automatically determine whether or not  
to reproduce particular DVD software by comparing its parental  
level (a measure of undesirability of scenes, etc. from educational  
viewpoint) set for the software beforehand with that set on this  
system by the user; if the software’s level is less restrictive than the  
user-set level, it will be reproduced.  
Component video signal  
A video signal system where parts of information necessary for  
reproducing image signal comprised of the three primary colors of  
light are transmitted via separate signal lines. Types of signal, such  
as R/G/B, Y/PB/PR, etc., are available.  
Playback control (PBC)  
Refers to the signal recorded on video CDs or SVCDs for  
controlling reproduction. By using menu screens recorded on a  
Video CD or SVCD that supports PBC, you can enjoy interactive-  
type software as well as software having a search function.  
Disc menu  
A screen display prepared for allowing selection of images, sounds,  
subtitles, multiangles, etc. recorded on a DVD.  
Progressive scan  
Interlaced scan  
Progressive scan displays all the horizontal lines of a picture at one  
time, as a single frame. This system can convert the interlaced  
video from DVD into progressive format for connection to a  
progressive display. It dramatically increases the vertical resolution.  
In the conventional video system, a picture is shown on the display  
monitor in two halves. The Interlaced scan system places lines of  
the second half of the picture in-between lines of the first half of the  
picture.  
Region Code  
JPEG  
A system for allowing discs to be played back only in the regions  
designated beforehand. All the countries in the world are divided  
into six regions, each region being identified by a specified Region  
Code (or region number). If the Region Code given to a disc  
includes a numeral which matches one in the Region Code of a  
player, the player can play back the disc.  
A still-picture data compression system proposed by the Joint  
Photographic Expert Group, which features small decrease in  
image quality in spite of its high compression ratio.  
Letter box  
A method of displaying wide images like movies in the center of a  
4:3 TV screen with no part of the image deleted, by placing black  
bands on the top and bottom of the screen. This name has resulted  
from the screen form looking literally like a letter box.  
Sampling frequency  
Frequency of sampling data when analog data is converted to  
digital data. Sampling frequency numerically represents how many  
times the original analog signal is sampled per second.  
Linear PCM (PCM: Pulse Code Modulation)  
A system for converting analog sound signal to digital signal for  
later processing, with no data compression used in conversion.  
Surround  
A system for creating three-dimensional sound fields full of realism  
by arranging multiple speakers around the listener.  
MP3  
A file format with a sound data compression system. “MP3” is the  
abbreviation of Motion Picture Experts Group 1 (or MPEG-1)  
Audio Layer 3. By using MP3 format, one CD-R or CD-RW can  
contain about 10 times as much data volume as a regular CD can.  
Transfer rate  
The rate of transferring digital data. Usually the measure is in baud  
per second. The DVD system applies a variable transfer rate system  
for high efficiency.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
Menu language (MENU LANGUAGE)........................................46  
4:3 LB......................................................................................47  
4:3 PS ......................................................................................47  
MP3........................................................................................3, 4, 34  
Index  
A
A-B Repeat Playback.................................................................... 43  
Audio CD.................................................................................... 3, 4  
Audio language (AUDIO LANGUAGE) ............................... 37, 46  
Auto standby (AUTO STANDBY) .............................................. 49  
On-screen guide icons (ON SCREEN GUIDE) ......................22, 49  
On-screen language (ON SCREEN LANGUAGE) ......................46  
B
Playback Control function (PBC)..............................................4, 33  
Program Playback (PROGRAM) ..................................................41  
Progressive mode (PROGRESSIVE) ............................................20  
C
Language menu (LANGUAGE)............................................. 46  
Level menu (LEVEL)............................................................. 48  
Surround mode.......................................................................27 – 30  
S-video.......................................................................................8, 12  
D
Dolby Digital ........................................................................ 27 – 29  
Dolby Pro Logic II................................................................ 27 – 29  
Pro Logic II Music (PL II MUSIC)................................ 27 – 29  
DSP mode ............................................................................. 27 – 30  
DTS Digital Surround........................................................... 27 – 29  
Dynamic range compression  
Test tone (TEST TONE)..........................................................30, 48  
Title..................................................................................................4  
Track................................................................................................4  
Treble (TREBLE)....................................................................19, 47  
Video CD (VCD).........................................................................3, 4  
Video Fine Processor (VFP)..........................................................40  
Zoom..............................................................................................39  
(D.RANGE COMPRESSION) ............................................... 47, 52  
F
Frame-by-frame playback............................................................. 39  
G
Group .............................................................................................. 4  
I
Interlace mode (INTERLACE)..................................................... 20  
J
JPEG ..................................................................................... 3, 4, 35  
L
Left/Right speaker balance (L/R BALANCE)........................ 47, 52  
Low frequency effect attenuater (LFE ATT.)......................... 47, 52  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
7 Subwoofer (SP-PWM45)  
Amplifier section  
Specifications  
Front/Center/Surround:  
80 W per channel, RMS at 6 C  
(Center/Surround)/80 W per channel,  
RMS at 4 C (Front)  
at 1 kHz, with 10 % total harmonic  
distortion.  
120 W, RMS at 4 C at 100 Hz, with  
10 % total harmonic distortion.  
7 Center unit (XV-THM42)  
Audio section  
Total Harmonic Distortion 0.02 %  
NOTE: This value is measured at System cord CONNECTOR for  
reference.  
Subwoofer:  
Audio input sensitivity/Impedance (at 1 kHz)  
Analog input:  
Speaker section  
Speaker unit:  
16 cm Bass-reflex, Magnetically  
Shielded  
30 Hz to 200 Hz  
AUDIO IN (VCR):  
Digital input*:  
DIGITAL IN (DBS): –21 dBm to –15 dBm  
(OPTICAL) (660 nm E30 nm)  
290 mV/47 kC  
Frequency Range:  
General  
Power Requirements:  
Power Consumption:  
* Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS Digital  
Surround (with sampling frequency — 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz)  
AC 120 V Ó, 60 Hz  
140 W (at operation)  
0 W (in standby mode)  
Video section  
Color System:  
NTSC  
Dimensions (W M H M D):216 mm M 353 mm M 485 mm  
Horizontal Resolution:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Video output level  
Composite:  
500 lines  
64 dB  
Mass:  
12.0 kg  
7 Satellite Speakers  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 C  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 C  
0.286 V(p-p)/75 C  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 C  
0.7 V(p-p)/75 C  
Front speakers (SP-THM45F)  
S-video-Y:  
S-video-C:  
Component-Y:  
Component-PB/PR:  
Speakers:  
8.0 cm  
Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded  
Power Handling Capacity: 120 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
4 C  
Video input sensitivity/Impedance (VCR IN)  
90 Hz to 20 kHz  
Composite:  
S-video-Y:  
S-video-C:  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 C  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 C  
0.286 V(p-p)/75 C  
Dimensions (W M H M D):103 mm M 115 mm M 100 mm  
Mass: 0.64 kg  
Surround speakers (SP-THM45S)  
Tuner section  
Tuning Range  
FM:  
Speakers:  
8.0 cm  
Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded  
Power Handling Capacity: 80 W  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
AM:  
Impedance:  
6 C  
General  
Power Requirements:  
Power Consumption:  
Frequency Range:  
90 Hz to 20 kHz  
AC 120 V Ó, 60 Hz  
20 W (at operation)  
1.0 W (in standby mode)  
Dimensions (W M H M D):103 mm M 115 mm M 100 mm  
Mass: 0.52 kg  
Dimensions (W M H M D):400 mm M 85 mm M 386 mm  
Mass:  
4.6 kg  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
7 Center Speaker (SP-THM45C)  
Speakers:  
8.0 cm  
Bass-reflex, Magnetically Shielded  
Power Handling Capacity: 80 W  
Impedance:  
6 C  
Frequency Range:  
90 Hz to 20 kHz  
Dimensions (W M H M D):103 mm M 115 mm M 100 mm  
Mass:  
0.64 kg  
7 Accessories  
• Remote control (1)  
• Batteries (2)  
• FM antenna (1)  
• AM loop antenna (1)  
• Power cord (1)  
• System cord (1)  
• Composite video cord (1)  
• Speaker cords  
5 m: For satellite (front left/right) and center speakers (3)  
10 m: For satellite speakers (surround left/right) (2)  
(The length of the above speaker cords are approximate.)  
Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EN, FR  
© 2003 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
0503SKMIDEJEM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Intel Network Card 82555 User Manual
Invacare Mobility Aid PatriotTM User Manual
Jabra Headphones BT8040 User Manual
JVC Computer Monitor LCT2582 001A H User Manual
JVC CRT Television LT 32EX177 User Manual
Kalorik Kitchen Grill SWP 39888 User Manual
Kathrein Satellite TV System MSK 200 S2 User Manual
Kenwood Stereo System 855 AV User Manual
Keys Fitness Home Gym KF RC User Manual
KitchenAid Oven KEBK206SBL04 User Manual